207
FM 6-20 WAR DEPARTMENT FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL TACTICS AND TECHENIQUE &FfIIAl CP¥Y EET'IIN TO rEF"E""ELiC SCTIO PROD'CTIC:I BjI.CH

FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FM 6-20

WAR DEPARTMENT

FIELD ARTILLERYFIELD MANUAL

TACTICS AND TECHENIQUE

&FfIIAl CP¥YEET'IIN TO

rEF"E""�ELiC SCTIOPROD'CTIC:I BjI.CH

Page 2: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

d FX w 6-20

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE

CHANGES 1 WAR DEPARTMENT,

NO. 1 J WASHINGTON, January 2, 1941.

FM 6-20, July 10, 1940, is changed as follows:

* 82. GENERAL.

f. The number of available noninterfering radio chan-nels (frequencies) is the controlling factor in the numberof radio sets of any type which may be used in any area.The number of channels needed by the triangular (square)division artillery is as follows:

(1) Three (eight) frequencies for the division artillerytactical net and (four) for the medium battalion liaison nets.

(2) Four (four) frequencies for the division artillery air-ground net.

(3) One (one) frequency for the division artillery anti-aircraft-antitank warning and control net.

(4) Eighteen (twenty-six) frequencies for the battalionliaison and battery observer nets distributed as follows:Five to each light battalion and three to each mediumbattalion.

g. Paragraphs 89 to 91, inclusive, describe a method ofemployment of the artillery radio sets. Within the limita-tions of the equipment and the available frequency chan-nels, they do not preclude other methods of employment orthe establishment of additional nets.

h. All of the division artillery antitank weapons areconcentrated in the antitank battery of the medium bat-talion(s) and the bulk of the antiaircraft weapons in theantiaircraft-antitank platoons of all battalions. On themarch, elements of these weapons are distributed through-out the column or placed at danger points along the routeof march. When the artillery is in position, a proper use ofthese weapons demands considerable dispersion laterally and

285898--41

Page 3: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

in depth, and in the event of a break-through, a means ofquickly concentrating elements not then engaged. Consid-ering the speed with which modern tanks and airplanes canmake an attack, a means of rapid intercommunication be-tween all antiaircraft-antitank elements is essential. Radiooffers the only solution. The radio set thus employed mustbe capable of instantaneous operation at all times, on themarch and in position. Time will not be available to setup the radio or to take it down when it becomes necessaryto move.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

* 89. TACTICAL RADIO NETS (fig. 8).-a. The division artillery (brigade) tactical net includes the headquarters sta-tion (NCS) and the battalion (regimental) stations. Thisnet is placed in operation prior to the installation of thewire system and during its interruption. When not in oper-ation, the nets should be checked at scheduled intervals toinsure their continued functioning. The operators of theradio stations in this net are used to operate the telegraphinstruments simplexed on the wire circuits. When thewire circuits are in operation, wire telegraph, not radio,should be used for communication between the headquartersconcerned.

b. The antiaircraft-antitank radio net provides a meansof warning, alerting, and controlling all antiaircraft-anti-tank units of the division artillery. This net includes thedivision artillery headquarters station, battalion stations,antitank battery of medium battalion(s), and all anti-aircraft-antitank platoons. Normally, messages having todo with the approach and attack of hostile tanks and air-planes will be transmitted by voice and ini clear text.

c. Artillery-infantry intercommunication is obtained whenpracticable by radio sets of either arm entering the net ofthe other.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

2

Page 4: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

V I

O Square division.

@ Div Artny

(D Triangular division.

FIGuRm 8.-Division artillery tactical nets.

3

Page 5: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

iDv Ardy

Nel aiyozlze P ·AA-ATe'oapoys a sing/ rh

PIAA-AT frepency. AT

'\ p \,,,

® Division artillery antiaircraft-antitank radio net (as applied intriangular division).

FIGURE 8.-Division artillery tactical nets-Continued.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

* 90. LIAISON AND FORWARD OBSERVER NETS.-a. Lightbattalion nets (fig. 9).-(1) Radio sets in the headquartersbattery and in each of the firing batteries of the light bat-talion provide radio communication for liaison officers, bat-tery and battalion observers, and alternative channels ofcommunication to supplement wire in an area usually sweptby hostile small-arms and artillery fire. The sets are suffi-cient in number to provide a flexibility in their use whichwill meet most of the tactical requirements of this battalion.

(2) The sets issued to each battery provide the batterycommander with radio communication with his executiveprior to the installation of the wire system. They supple-

4

Page 6: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

ment the wire communication between the observation postand the firing battery after the battery is in position. Thesets should be used to-

(a) Provide radio communication for the battery forwardobserver. The forward observer may be directed to reporttargets by radio directly to the battalion fire directioncenter.

(b) Leapfrog observation posts when the terrain permits.(c) Provide communication between the battery and the

battalion fire direction center prior to the installation andduring interruptions of the battery-battalion wire circuit.

(3) The sets issued to the battalion headquartersprovide-

(a) The battalion commander with radio communicationwith the elements of his battalion.

(b) Radio communication between the liaison officers andthe battalion command post, and also between the batteryforward observers and the battalion command post (firedirection center).

(c) Uninterrupted communication with liaison officers andbatteries during displacement of the batteries or of thebattalion command post.

b. Medium battalion nets.-(l) The battalion liaison andobserver nets include stations at the battalion commandpost and those with liaison officers and battalion and batteryforward observers. The nets are used by liaison officers inrequesting reinforcing fires for the light artillery and inreporting the effectiveness thereof, and by forward andflank observers of the battalion in the adjustment andsurveillance of fires of the battalion.

(2) The battery forward observer nets are organized, ingeneral, similar to those of the light battalion. It maybe desirable to have the battery forward observers reportall targets by radio directly to the battalion fire directioncenter. In situations where that procedure is desirable,one radio set should be taken from each battery and installedat the battalion fire direction center.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

5

Page 7: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

,,or fard Observers

/ \ { 'n Or

I I I J

66W6--- 66\ rom,7w,?cPost

Solid lines indicate primary use.Broken lines indicate secondary use.

In general, no attempt should be made to operate more than twoSCR-194 sets at a time in a single net.

Five frequencies, A, B, C, D, and E, are assigned to the battalion.

PicunII 9.-A method of employment of liaison and forward observersets of a light battalion.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

91. AIR-GROUND RADIO NET (fig. 10.)-a. The air-ground net of the division artillery includes the divisionartillery headquarters station (NCS) and the battalionstations. The net is organized on a given frequency (W)as a directed net when a single airplane is present orexpected, or on a schedule prescribed by the division ar-tillery headquarters. At all other times the net is silent.

6

Page 8: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

P ±Div Arty CP

Observotio&god / \; ~ A/rp/olze

(i) Net showing three airplanes working with division artillery,details as to frequency and assignment having been prearranged.

May be /1stenY Di;v A'rty CPon any frency ,

%61 I --

( Net showing one airplane working with three battalions whileanother works with the fourth battalion.

FIGURE 10.-Examples of air-ground radio nets.

[A. G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

7

Page 9: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

b. If more than one airplane is available, each is assignedto a regiment (square division only), a battalion, or a groupof battalions, and a frequency (W, X, Y, or Z) is designatedfor each airplane. These arrangements are made by thedivision artillery headquarters prior to the take-off of theairplane. Each airplane then reports directly on the pre-arranged frequency to the station that will control itsmission. It will be unusual to require an airplane tochange frequency while in flight; if a change in frequencyis necessary, ground stations shift to the frequency of theairplane.

[A.G. 062.11 (12-13-40).] (C1, Jan. 2,1941.)

* 141. FIRE DIRECTION.* * * * * * *

d. Control by higher units.-Commanders of higher unitsexercise general control by allocating reinforcing artillery,by organizing the artillery for combat, by assigning normaland contingent zones, by specifying the locality or localitieswhere units must be prepared to mass their fires, by provid-ing for the issue of maps, photomaps, and air photos, by coor-dinating the surveys, and by procuring and coordinating airobservation. Such specific instructions as may be necessaryare issued concerning communications, methods of target des-ignation, registrations, and fires to be prepared. In order toconcentrate effective fire on important targets, higher com-manders endeavor by their control measures to insure thatan adequate number of battalions are prepared to firepromptly and accurately in critical areas, and that the assign-ment of targets to subordinate units can be made instantlyand unmistakably by reference to maps, photomaps, airphotos, or concentrations for which data have been prepared.

[A. G. 062.11 (1-25-41).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

· 171. EARLY RESUMPTION OF OFFENSIVE NOT CONTEMPLATED.-a. General.--(1) * * * fires are coordinated, and the sys-tems of command, signal communication, observation, liaison,and ammunition supply are developed as time permits. * * *

* * * * * * *

[A. G. 062.11 (1-2-41).] (C 1, Jan. 2, 1941.)

· 204. GENERAL.-* ** * * * * * *

8

Page 10: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

f. Continual care must be exercised to protect ammunition fromthe action of the weather. (FM 7-40 and FM 6-130.)

[A. G. 062.11 (1-2-41).] (C1, Jan. 2,1941.)

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:

G. C. MARSHALL,Chief of Staff.

OFFICIL :E. S. ADAMS,

Major General,The Adjutant General.

9U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1941

Page 11: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FM 6-20

FIELD ARTILLERYFIELD MANUAL

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE

Prepared under direction of theChief of Field Artillery

UNITED STATES

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

WASHINGTON: 1940

For sale by the Superintendentof Documents, Washington. D.C. - Price 30 cents

Page 12: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

WAR DEPARTMENT,WASHINGTON, July 10, 1940.

FM 6-20, Field Artillery Field Manual, Tactics and Tech-nique, is published for the information and guidance of allconcerned.

[A. G. 062.11 (6-16-39).]

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:

G. C. MARSHALL,OFFICIAL: Chief of Staff.

E. S. ADAMS,Major General,

The Adjutant General.

Page 13: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraphs PagePART ONE. RECONNAISSANCE, OCCUPATION, AND OR-

GANIZATION OF POSITION.CHAPTER 1. General.

SECTION I. Positions _--------__--------- 1-20 1II. Reconnaissance ----_--------- 21-31 11

CHAPTER 2. Procedure.SECTION I. General __---_- __ __------_-- _ 32-34 17

II. The battery _.------_____- __- 35-40 18III. The battalion------______---- 41-46 24IV. The regiment ___----- _____. __ 47-52 28V. The brigade (or division artil-

lery) ---------------------- 53-55 29CHAPTER 3. Protection of units in position.

SECTION I. Camouflage -.---.----------- 56-59 31II. Field fortifications--______--- 60-64 35

III. Defense against chemical at-tack, aircraft, and groundtroops -------------------- 65-68 38

PART Two, SIGNAL COMMUNICATION.CHAPTER 1. General __-___-- _-__------------ 69-73 41CHAPTER 2. Means of communication__ -- _-- 74-81 44CHAPTER 3. Communication systems of field

artillery units.SECTION I. Infantry division artillery -___ 82-92 52

II. Cavalry division, corps, andarmy artillery-------------- 93-95 66

PART THREE, TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT.CHAPTER 1. General -_________-_______-_____ 96-102 69CHAPTER 2. General combat duties of artillery

officers, artillery commanders,and artillery staffs.

SECTION I. General ------------------- 103-104 75II. Artillery officers__-----..---- 105-109 75

III. Corps artillery brigade com-manders; regimental, battal-ion, and battery command-ers __-…-__-__----------- 110-113 78

IV. Field artillery staffs-__-_____ 114-123 80CHAPTER 3. Fire in combat--__--_---------- 124-136 97CHAPTER 4. Tactical functions--_________-_ 137-147 108CHAPTER 5. Combat considerations.

SECTION I. General -_-- __-------_----- 148-151 118II. On the march and at halts__ 152-158 120

III. With security detachments__ 159-162 124IV. Offensive combat--__________ 163-169 128

V. Defensive combat___________ -- 170-172 137VI. Retrograde movements------ 173-178 145

VII. With Cavalry - -_____________- 179-183 149VIII. In special operations------- 184-189 151

IX. Estimate of artillery require-ments ------------------- 190-191 155

CHAPTER 6. Plans and orders__ __---------- 192-196 158

III

Page 14: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART FOUR. LOGISTICS. Paragraphs PageCHAPTER 1. Supply other than ammunition in

artillery units --------__ -__. 197-203 165CHAPTER 2. Artillery ammunition supply __ 204-212 171CHAPTER 3. Evacuation and hospitalization,

replacement, maintenance, andsalvage --------------------- 213-216 177

CHAPTER 4. Marches --------------- __--_-- 217-218 180CHAPTER 5. Movements by rail and water.

SECTION I. Rail --------------_------- 219-227 181II. Water --------------------- 228-233 185

Index -_-________-- ____________-_________-____-_- _ __ 187

IV

Page 15: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

FM 6-20

FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUALTACTICS AND TECHNIQUE

(The matter contained herein supersedes parts two, three, four,and five, FAFM volume II, December 28, 1931, and TR 430-135,April 18, 1934.)

PART ONF

RECONNAISSANCE, OCCUPATION, ANDORGANIZATION OF POSITION

CHAPTER 1

GENERALParagraphs

SEcTIoN I. Positions ____------__--__--------- ____-_------ 1-20II. Reconnaissance ---------- __---------------- 21-31

SECTION I

POSITIONS

· 1. GENERAL.-a. The term "position" has reference pri-marily to the position occupied or to be occupied by thepieces, Observation posts, command posts, battalion am-munition trains, and other artillery services and installa-tions are located for effective employment of the pieces.

b. Positions are selected for the pieces and for all otherelements of the command, such as observation posts, com-mand posts, aid stations, rear echelons, limbers (trucks,tractors), auxiliary weapons, and trains.

* 2. CLASSIFICATION.-Positions are classified as follows:a. General.-(1) Laing.-A position behind a mask, in

which indirect laying is necessary, is an indirect layingposition. A position from which the target can be seenthrough the sights is a direct laying position.

(2) Concealment.-The terms' "concealed" and "uncon-cealed" are used to indicate whether or not a battery maybe seen by enemy observers. When these terms are used,the type of enemy observation (ground, balloon, or airplane)should be indicated.

1

Page 16: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

2-3 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(3) Defilade.-The term "defilade" is relative and impliesa degree of protection from fire or concealment from ob-servers through the presence of intervening ground forms;thus, flash defilade implies the concealment of the flashof the pieces from enemy ground observation. Defilade isalso used with reference to protection from hostile fire.

(4) Cover.-Cover refers to artificial or natural protec-tion from enemy fire.

(5) Open position.-An open position is one affordingneither cover nor concealment other than camouflage.

b. Tactical.-(1) An alternate position is an additionalposition prepared by a battery from which it may executeits prescribed missions. When the situation permits, one ormore alternate positions are prepared and kept concealedin order that a battery whose position has been located bythe enemy may avoid the effect of hostile fire on that posi-tion by moving, generally under cover of darkness, to analternate position.

(2) A dummy position is one prepared to simulate anoccupied battery position in order to deceive the enemyeither as to the amount of artillery present or as to theposition of a battery firing from the vicinity of the dummyposition. When the situation permits, a piece may beregistered from the dummy position in order to mislead theenemy. Results of the registration may be referred to theoccupied position by survey.

(3) An artillery unit is "in position" when the pieces are inposition and ready to fire and the necessary systems ofobservation and communication have been established.

(4) An artillery unit is posted "in readiness" when it isheld near one or more possible positions, prepared to movequickly into position when ordered. Cover and concealmentare major considerations in the selection of positions inreadiness. While posted in readiness, a unit makes all pos-sible preparations to expedite its entry into action. Whenthe firing positions to be occupied are known, they are or-ganized as far as practicable and firing data are prepared.

* 3. CONSIDERATIONS GOVERNING SELECTION.-a. The primary

requisite in the selection of a battery position is to choose onefrom which the pieces can carry out effectively the mission

2

Page 17: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 3-5

assigned. The range is a deciding factor, since the pieces mustbe able to reach the target area, and within this area, deadspace must be at a minimum.

b. Selection is governed first by considerations affectingdelivery of fire as follows:

(1) Range.(2) Field of fire and dead space.(3) Observation.(4) Signal communication.(5) Character of ground at emplacement.c. Next, by considerations affecting defense of the position

as follows:(1) Concealment, including defilade.(2) Concealment and protection for limbers, motor vehicles,

ammunition trains, and auxiliary installations.(3) Terrain minimizing effect of chemical attack.(4) Security as afforded by proximity of other arms, char-

acteristics for close defense, defense against mechanizedattack, and antiaircraft defense.

(5) Availability of alternate and dummy positions.d. Finally by administrative considerations as follows:(1) Facility of movement and supply.(2) Interference with operations of other troops.(3) Facilities for providing shelter and comfort for per-

sonnel.

* 4. RANGE.-Due regard having been given to the tacticalsituation, artillery positions in general should be well forwardto permit full use of the available range of the weapons ifoccasion demands.

* 5. FIELD OF FIRE AND DEAD SPACE (FM 6-40).-a. Techni-cally, the field of fire of a battery includes all the ground inthe direction of the enemy that the battery can cover effec-tively with fire. Usually, when the field of fire of a battery isspoken of, it includes only that part of the battery's possiblefield of fire within which the orders of the higher artillerycommander indicate that it is expected to employ its firepower. Pieces should be so sited as to cover this field of fire.

b. The terrain between the mask and the points of impactof trajectories just clearing the mask is dead space. The

3

Page 18: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

5-8 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

limits of the dead space for available ammunition with thelowest muzzle velocity should be determined as soon as pos--sible and marked on a map or chart together with the fieldof fire. Dead space for howitzers seldom exists.

c. By the skillful selection of gun positions, dead spacemay be reduced to a minimum.

d. In a battalion, the extent of dead space may be greatlyreduced and the field of fire enlarged by disposing the bat-teries so that a dead space for one battery will be within thefield of fire of another.

e. In occupying positions behind a mask, clearance of themask at the anticipated minimum range should be assuredbefore the guns arrive.

1 6. OssERVATION.-Proximity of good observation posts(OP's) usually has a decided influence upon the selection ofartillery positions, especially when quick action is required.Ground observation is of importance under all circumstances.

* 7. SIGNAL COMMUNICATION (pt. two) .- In the selection ofartillery positions, due consideration must be given to thepossibilities of successful establishment and maintenance ofsuitable signal communication. The telephone is the primarymeans of communication but the establishment of auxiliarymeans, such as radio, visual, and messenger, should not beneglected. The main points to be considered in this con-nection are-

a. Desirability of short lines.b. Simplicity of the system.c. Utilization of existing wire lines when authorized.d. Roads and trails for reels, messengers, etc.e. Ease of maintenance, especially at night.f. Concealment and cover for wire lines and personnel.g. Avoidance of interference by traffic and troops.h. Possibility of raising wire lines off the ground.i. Possibility of using visual signaling.

· 8. CHARACTER OF GROUND AT EMPLACEMENT.-Character ofthe soil is important because rocks, loose 'sand, and mudafford insecure trail seating and complicate trail shiftingfor light weapons; for heavy weapons, particularly the 240-mm howitzer, unsuitable ground may preclude effective oper-

4

Page 19: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 8-9

ation. Furthermore, pronounced slope of the position areamay preclude securing the desired elevation for light weapons;even a slight slope increases the difficulty of emplacing the240-mm howitzer.

* 9. CONCEALMENT INCLUDING DEFILADE.-G. Positions selectedshould be suitable for indirect laying, except for antitankguns or in situations where there is little danger to beexpected from hostile artillery or long range machine-gunfire. It is only by concealing all elements of the commandor by rendering them inconspicuous by suitable use of camou-flage, that the sustained service of an artillery command canbe insured in the face of an active enemy.

b. When practicable, pieces should have at least flashdefilade from all points within the enemy's position. Indaylight, this distance below the plane of defilade is about5 yards for light artillery and 10 yards for medium andheavy. During darkness, flash-ranging units may be ableto obtain fairly accurate locations of pieces which have con-siderably greater defilade.

c. To save time before making a ground reconnaissance,the map should be studied for a position of desired defilade.Since, in general, the security of a position increases with itsdefilade and balloon observation may be attempted by theenemy, positions having the maximum defilade compatiblewith the mission and permissible dead space are desirable.

d. Positions on or near the crest of a reverse slope facilitaterunning the pieces up to the crest should direct laying benecessary. However, if the position is discovered by theenemy, and the crest is plainly seen by him, the pieces arein a very vulnerable position, since the reverse slope maybe searched very effectively by fire. Protection against gasis more easily accomplished in a crest position and drainageof the position is simplified. Positions of deep defllade aregenerally easier of access and of greater security but mayhave the tactical disadvantage of increased dead space, aresubject to accumulations of gas, and may present difficultieswith respect to underground shelter and drainage.

e. Every advantage of natural and artificial means shouldbe taken to conceal positions. All indications of the occupa-

5

Page 20: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

9-10 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

tion and improvement of a position and the approachesthereto should be carefully concealed from air observation,including air photography. Good positions affording con-cealment, particularly when considered relative to possi-bilities for camouflage, may be found (par. 57)-

(1) On the edge of a road or trail. Such positions areeasily accessible for supply of ammunition, may be taken upwith the minimum evidences of occupancy, and are particu-larly appropriate for heavy artillery. However, if the roadis much used, the firing and the supplying of ammunitionmay obstruct traffic. Positions close to and on the leewardside of dusty roads or too close to roads subject to artilleryfire should be avoided.

(2) In slightly wooded areas of considerable extent con-sisting of small trees or brush, particularly where the cuttingdown of trees is unnecessary, or in isolated open spaces ina large wood. While positions at the forward edge of smallclumps of woods or under a line of trees have certain ad-vantages over positions in the open, they are easy to locate'accurately and facilitate hostile fire adjustment.

(3) In ruins or in a village. Such positions generallyfacilitate concealment, especially if the pieces are irregularlyspaced. They permit construction of camouflage and defenseswithout attracting attention and make it simpler to avoidevidences of occupancy.

(4) Irregularly spaced over open ground. Such positionsmay frequently prove most satisfactory in situations involvingrapid movements. However, they are difficult to conceal,especially from air photography. This difficulty is greaterif there are visible routes of supply and other evidences ofoccupancy.

* 10. CONCEALMENT AND PROTECTION FOR LIMBERS, MOTOR

VEHICLES, AND BATTALION AMMUNITION TRAIN.---a. Limbers andmotor vehicles.-(1) Maximum concealment and protectionand free and prompt access to the positions are the objectssought in the choice of positions for limbers and motorvehicles. The position to be occupied and the formation tobe taken by these vehicles depend upon the nature of theconcealment and protection available.

Page 21: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 10-11

(2) Concealment may be obtained best by utilizing woodsor broken terrain; camouflage of vehicles in the open isdifficult.

(3) Ridges having gentle slopes afford concealment fromground view but little protection from searching fire. Theeffect of searching fire in such cases may be avoided or greatlyreduced by placing the vehicles more than 400 yards in rearof the covering crest. If they cannot be withdrawn to a flank,they should be at least 500 yards in rear of the pieces. Intruck-drawn artillery, the trucks, because of their greaterspeed, may be placed farther from the gun position.

(4) When it is impracticable to conceal the limbers andmotor vehicles from the view of the enemy, they should beposted as far from the pieces as conditions warrant andbe scattered irregularly.

b. Battalion ammunition train.-(1) The battalion am-munition train is posted in accordance with instructions ofthe battalion commander. The main considerations in se-lecting positions are concealed approaches to the positionsof firing batteries, protection from hostile fire, and conceal-ment from hostile air observation. Other considerations areample space to permit parking the vehicles with considerableintervals and ease of access to roads running toward theammunition supply point and toward the batteries.

(2) It is desirable that ammunition-train positions be rela-tively close to the firing batteries which they serve. The dis-tances will depend upon the nature of the transportation andthe availability of cover. In horse-drawn units, the distancespreferably should not exceed 1,200 yards.

* 11. EFFECT OF TERRAIN ON CHEMICAL ATTACK (par. 65).-Tall grass, bushes, trees, and buildings increase the dangerfrom gas. They add to the chances of contamination fromcontact with persistent gas unless steps are taken to provideclear routes for intercommunication within and movementfrom the battery position. They retard the movement of air,thus prolonging the effects of nonpersistent gas concentra-tions as well as increasing the vapor concentrations of per-sistent gas.

7

Page 22: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

12-16 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 12. SECURITY (sec. III, ch. 3).-An important consideration,particularly for batteries on a flank and when mechanizedattack is to be guarded against, is the location of troops of

'other arms. The artillery commander should determinewhether these troops have organized the ground on the flank,the location of such works, and whether they will affordsecurity against the operations of mechanized vehicles.Whenever consistent with the performance of assigned mis-sions, the position selected should be such that it favors thesiting of the pieces so as to permit their employment in closedefense.

* 13. ALTERNATE AND DUMMY POSITIONS.-Alternate anddummy positions should be available (par. 2b). They shouldbe so located that fire directed at them will not endanger theprincipal battery position.

* 14. FACILITY OF MOVEMENT AND SUPPLY.-The ideal positionpermits concealed and defiladed movement to the front, rear,and flanks. In selecting a position, therefore, due considera-tion must be given to ease of movement in and out of theposition and to the effect of different weather conditions.A few hours of rain or a sudden thawing of the ground mayrender movement impossible in an otherwise good position.Facility of ammunition supply is of primary importance andconcealed approaches for daytime ammunition supply makefor less interruption by hostile fire.

* 15. INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TROOPS.--Sites selected forbattery positions are usually far enough in rear of the frontline to avoid interference with other troops. It may be neces-sary, however, to select battery positions in close proximityto supports or reserves, or even on the ground which theyactually occupy. In such cases, the superior commanderusually will make the ground available to the artillery unlessit has some other tactical use of greater importance. Careshould be taken to avoid placing a battery so close in rearof another that the blast will interfere with the service ofthe latter's pieces.

A 16. FACILITIES FOR SHELTER AND COMFORT OF PERSONNEL.-Morale of personnel is furthered by steps taken for their secur-ity and comfort. Chief among these are prompt and ade-

8

Page 23: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 16-18

quate supply of food and water, medical attention, suitableshelter, and timely reliefs.

* 17. OBSERVATION POSTS.--Positions selected for observationposts should give an extensive and clear view of the zone offire, facilitate prompt establishment and maintenance ofsignal communication, afford cover and concealment, and beas near to the front and the line of fire as practicable. Treetops, shell holes, ruins, steel towers, windmills, chimneys,church steeples, and front line trenches may be used onoccasion as observation posts. Construction of observationposts may vary from hastily prepared cover and concealmentto a well-equipped concrete dugout. (See FM 5-15.)

* 18. COMMAND 'PosTs.--a. The various elements of a com-mand post, such as the telephone central, message center,radio station or stations, and fire-direction center, are habit-ually dispersed for purposes of concealment, protection, andavoidance of congestion. Positions selected should facilitatethe transmission of messages, provide ample space for com-mand post activities, and be concealed or lend themselvesto effective camouflage. Cover, if not available, may be con-structed if warranted by the situation. The location mustbe such as will facilitate to the maximum the exercise ofcommand and preferably will insure close association with thecommanders of supported troops. The amount of circula-tion in the proximity of command posts necessitates the care-ful camouflage of approaches and strict camouflage discipline.In a rapidly moving situation, it is not unusual for artillerybattalion and battery commanders initially to place the ele-ments of observation posts and command posts together ornear together. Under these circumstances, the respectivepersonnel should be kept separated; command post elementsshould be placed at such distance away from the observationpost as the performance of their duties and concealmentpermit. Separate positions should be selected for the twoposts as soon as feasible.

b. The controlling feature in the location of commandposts of battalions is facility of communication with batteriesand with the artillery regimental command post; when prac-

Page 24: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

18-20 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

ticable, a battalion command post is placed in proximity tothat of the commander of the supported troops.

c. While normally regimental command posts are nearthose of commanders of supported troops, locations shouldfacilitate communication with battalions and with the nexthigher artillery commander.

d. Command posts of division and corps artillery officersshould be near the division and corps commanders, respec-tively.

[] 19. REAR ECHELONS.-. Selection of positions for the rearechelons, which. include battery maintenance sections andadministrative elements, is made with a view to obtainingthe maximum concealment and protection consistent with theexercise of their proper functions and minimum interferencewith combat troops.

b. In stabilized situations, the various administrative unitsof the battalion and batteries and the maintenance sections,limbers, and trucks may be located at or near the positionof the battalion ammunition train, which may be establishedfarther to the rear than when in fast-moving situations. Thisis generally called the rear echelon of the battalion. Batteriesseldom establish separate rear echelons.

" 20. AID STATIONS.--a. The ideal site for the battalion aidstation is one centrally located in rear of the battery posi-tions along the natural line of drift for the wounded fromthe combat installations in front. A position in close prox-imity to an installation likely to draw fire is avoided. Desir-able features sought are-

(1) Protection and concealment.(2) Proximity to concealed routes from the firing batteries.(3) Ease of contact with the firing batteries.(4) Ease of access by ambulances.(5) Proximity to water.(6) Shelter from weather.b. The veterinary aid station (normally one per animal-

drawn regiment) is established at or near the point wherethe animals of the unit are assembled. In selecting the loca-tion, the following points should be considered:

10

Page 25: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 20-21

(1) Accessibility to the animals of the firing batteries,battalion and regimental headquarters, and battalion ammu-nition trains.

(2) Concealment and protection.(3) Adequate water supply.(4) Concealed and protected routes to the rear.

SECTION II

RECONNAISSANCE

* 21. GENERAL.--a. Reconnaissance consists of the examina-tion of territory by one or more individuals for the purposeof obtaining information; as affecting Field Artillery, it com-pris'es reconnaissance for positions, routes, and informationconcerning targets.

b. This section deals primarily with that reconnaissancewhich seeks information to facilitate the entry of artilleryinto action; that is, reconnaissance for suitable locations forthe various installations and routes thereto. Such reconnais-sance must precede the occupation of position by the max-imum amount of time available; the available amount oftime determines the amount of detail possible in the recon-naissance.

c. The following doctrines are applicable to all artilleryreconnaissance.

(1) Reconnaissance is carefully planned with a definiteobject in view and should be made in conjunction with asuitable map or air photo.

(2) It must be active, timely, and continuous, in order toinsure the uninterrupted movement of artillery units intoposition and the delivery of effective fire.

(3) Reconnoitering parties must be limited to the individ-uals and vehicles actually required and advantage must betaken of all available concealment.

(4) An early study from a high point overlooking thearea to be reconnoitered facilitates prompt decisions, allowsthe remaining reconnaissance to be planned effectively, andlessens probability of being observed by the enemy.

(5) Artillery reconnaissance should be progressive (par. 26).

11

Page 26: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

22-25 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 22. FOR POSITIONS.--a. The tactical situation and the planof action decided upon by the commander of the troops limitthe area within which artillery takes position. Thus theartillery usually is not entirely free to choose its own locations,but must make the best use of terrain within the limits im-posed as determined by reconnaissance of the allotted area.

b. When positions for artillery elements of a particularcommand are selected in the area of another command, pro-vision for the reservation of the positions to be occupied mustbe made by a higher commander.

* 23. FOR ROUTES.-Reconnaissance for suitable routes in-cludes search for concealment and for ground over whichthe vehicles may be moved with the least difficulty and dangerfrom enemy fire or from persistent gas.

* 24. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL WITH COMMANDER.-When-ever possible, personnel accompanying the commander on hisreconnaissance should include the communication officer ornoncommissioned officer. This procedure will greatly facili-tate the installation of the initial communication system byfurnishing early information regarding the location of thecommand post, observation post, and routes for wire lines.

E 25. FOR INFORMATION CONCERNING THE ENEMY.--. Whilereconnaissance for locating the enemy and for gaining pre-liminary information concerning him devolves in large partupon troops of other arms, the artillery must utilize to theutmost its available intelligence agencies, especially for locat-ing enemy artillery. Artillery commanders employ everymeans in their power to establish such relations with com-manders of other arms as will insure prompt transmissionof information to the artillery, since successful artillery sup-port depends in large measure upon prompt receipt of suchinformation.

b. The artillery must determine, by consultation with thesupported unit commander, the fire desired by that unit.However, continuous reconnaissance and observation is essen-tial to determine additional targets on which artillery fireshould be placed; the artillery cannot depend exclusivelyupon the troops it is supporting to tell it when, where, andhow to employ all its fire. Artillery liaison officers accom-

12

Page 27: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 25-26

panying the commanders of supported units determine andreport information of tactical and technical value to theartillery command to which they belong, including the effectof both hostile and friendly artillery fire and the descriptionand location of suitable artillery targets.

c. In addition to liaison personnel, reconnaissance partiesare sent out by battalion and higher commanders to gainspecial information.

* 26. PROGRESSIVEI RECONNAISSANCE.--a. All field artillerycommanders habitually precede their commands to the posi-tion to be occupied.

b. In order to obtain early information of the plan ofaction and missions of artillery, the artillery commanderkeeps in close touch with the force commander and shouldaccompany him on reconnaissance. As early as practicable,the artillery commander formulates his artillery plan andcommunicates it at the earliest opportunity by an oral, dic-tated, or written order to his next subordinates. Thus com-mences an artillery reconnaissance that is taken up as soonas practicable by each commander down to include that ofthe battery.

c. In large commands, this progressive reconnaissance ismade first by brigade commanders to determine suitable areasfor the employment of their regiments; second, by regimentalcommanders to select the general location of battalion posi-tion areas; third, by battalion commanders in greater detail,to locate within narrow limits the positions for the batteries,battalion ammunition trains, and other elements of the bat-talions; and finally, by battery commanders to determine theexact positions for the pieces and other battery elements.Two or more of these various steps frequently are carried outconcurrently or merge together. It is essential that sufficienttime is provided to allow appropriate reconnaissance by thelower units and for formulation of plans by subordinatecommanders.

d. Brigade commanders will rarely be able to make aground reconnaissance of the regimental areas but will usu-ally find it necessary to assign them from a map reconnais-sance, supplemented by information received from all otheravailable sources. Reconnaissance on the ground is always

238273-40-2 13

Page 28: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

26-29 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

to be preferred but should be preceded by as detailed a studyof the map as time will permit.

* 27. MARCH RECONNAISSANCE.-During marches in the pres-ence of the enemy, artillery reconnaissance is continuous.Artillery commanders, by a study of maps and air photosand by use of their reconnaissance personnel, keep themselvesinformed as to possible observation posts and positions nearthe line of march or probable assembly positions and routesthereto. As contact becomes imminent and the general areain which it will occur becomes evident, reconnaissance is in-tensified and preparations for an early entry into action arecompleted. Artillery reconnaissance personnel accompaniesthe advanced elements of the command for the purpose oflocating artillery targets, suitable observation posts, positions,and routes of advance. Such personnel conducts a recon-naissance based on instructions from the artillery commanderin conjunction with the reconnaissance personnel sent out bythe column commander.

· 28. INSTRUCTIONS TO UNITS DURING RECONNAISSANCE.-a.When a commander goes forward on reconnaissance, heinstructs the officer left in command on the following points,as far as may be appropriate:

(1) The tactical situation.(2) Whether the command is to follow at once; if so, the

route to be followed, rate of march, and a destination calledthe "rendezvous" to which the command will proceed.

b. Additional instructions may be transmitted from timeto time by markers, who should be left at places where uncer-tainty as to the route may arise or where there are difficul-ties to be avoided. As soon as the battery positions and thebest routes for approaching them have been selected, thebattalions or batteries are sent for and guided to their respec-tive positions.

R 29. TIME AVAILABLE.--- . Under some circumstances, a re-connaissance may be carried on for days, as in the prepara-tion for an offensive on a large scale. Under other circum-stances, the reconnaissance must be completed within a fewhours, or even a few minutes, while artillery units are march-ing toward the positions they are to occupy.

14

Page 29: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 29-31

b. When it is necessary to bring artillery into action quicklyfor the support of other troops, delay occasioned by a pro-tracted search for positions affording technical and tacticaladvantages is unwarranted. The main consideration is toplace the pieces in a position from which they can rendereffective support as promptly as possible. Such reconnais-sance should be as thorough as time permits, but should becompleted in time to allow the batteries to march to theirpositions without halting.

c. Generally, the speed at which the truck-drawn firingbatteries are capable of moving does not allow the recon-naissance parties as much time for reconnaissance as inthe case of horse-drawn artillery. It is, therefore, especiallyimportant in the case of truck-drawn artillery that recon-naissance be initiated as early as possible and be made withthe greatest practicable speed. To restrict the speed of thebatteries in order to gain more time for reconnaissance wouldsacrifice a most valuable characteristic.

* 30. FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.-The reconnaissance for posi-tions for heavy artillery usually commences with a recon-naissance of roads and an examination of bridges to determinewhether they are strong enough for the passage of the heavyloads involved. It is desirable to have the engineers assistthe artillery in this reconnaissance. The selection of positionsfor the very heavy units depends largely upon the locationof suitable roads for advance and for supply, and upon theavailability of narrow or standard gage railroads for thesupply of ammunition.

* 31. LOCATION OF ARTILLERY COMMANDERS AND DETAILS DUR-

ING MARCH INTO ACTION.- . No definite location and forma-tion can be prescribed for artillery units on the march whencontact with the enemy is expected. Artillery commanders,in accordance with orders of the force commander, give thenecessary instructions in each case to place their troops inthe most advantageous positions practicable to meet theanticipated requirements of the tactical situation. For thisreason, the march formations of the headquarters personneland materiel provided for the purpose of reconnaissance,security, observation, and signal communication are made asflexible as possible.

15

Page 30: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

31 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

b. An artillery unit commander may order his subordinatecommanders, with all or parts of their parties, to join hisparty or detail (par. 33) during the march into action. Ingeneral, a unit commander reporting to a superior will notaccompany this superior to a still higher superior unlessspecifically ordered to do so. A party, when not with asuperior unit, marches with the remainder of the detail.When reporting to the next higher commander for orders,subordinate commanders may be able to echelon their detailsforward to the vicinity of the rendezvous, making them morequickly available for subsequent use.

16

Page 31: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 2

PROCEDUREParagraphs

SECTION I. General ----____ _________________-----____---__ 32-34II. The battery ---- ---....._________________-_ 35-40

III. The battalion ___-_____________________________ 41-46IV. The regiment__-____- _._____________._________- 47-52V. The brigade (or division artillery) ___---____--- _- 53-55

SECTION I

GENERAL

· 32. GENERAL.-Instructions in this chapter apply primarilyto light artillery but the principles apply equally to mediumand heavy artillery. The methods employed by the largercalibers are in general the same as those employed by thelight artillery, with obvious modifications incident to differ-ences in transportation, mobility, and time available. Nofixed rules can be laid down for the employment of details.The method of employment must be sufficiently flexible to beadaptable to varied circumstances. The methods outlinedherein must be considered as a guide only.

· 33. PERSONNEL.--a. A r t i l e r y details.-Each unit com-mander, from the battery to the brigade, inclusive, has agroup of officers and enlisted men known as "the detail" toassist him in operations incident to reconnaissance and occu-pation of position. It includes sufficient personnel for thereconnaissance, installation, and operation of the communica-tion system; operation of instruments; messenger service;route marking; survey operations; operation of observationposts and command posts; fire direction; and where appropri-ate, liaison. Constant effort must be made to restrict thesedetails to the smallest number of individuals consistent withefficient performance of essential functions.

b. Organization of details.-In general, a detail consists ofthe commander's "party" and the "remainder of the detail."The party contains certain key officers and men who usuallyaccompany the commander on the march and assist him in

17

Page 32: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

33-35 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

reconnaissance, in issuing his initial orders, in initiating themovement forward to position, and in the occupation andorganization of position. The actual organization of the de-tail varies with the organization, type of materiel, caliberof weapon, and means of transport. To meet the require-ments of the average case, members of details are assignednormal duties in accordance with the individual aptitudesof the men; but duties of individuals are variable, inter-changeable, and elastic, and details should be trained withthis in view.

* 34. ORDERS (ch. 6, pt. three).-During reconnaissance andoccupation of position, formal written field orders are neverissued by a battery commander; such orders may be issued byhigher commanders if a high degree of stabilization exists.In a moving situation, orders of all artillery commandersusually are issued orally and in fragmentary form. Eachindividual is given his instructions as the situation requires.Oral and fragmentary orders of regimental and higher com-manders usually should be confirmed later by written ordersonly when such written orders can be issued in sufficient timeto be of some use to subordinates in planning their operations.

SECTION II

THE BATTERY

* 35. RECONNAISSANCE BY BATTERY COMMANDER.- . The bat-tery commander must reach the position in ample time forreconnaissance, formulation of a definite plan, and issuance ofnecessary orders so that the position may be occupied andeffective fire opened without delay.

b. The battery commander is usually accompanied by thebattery commander's party when he reports to the battalioncommander for reconnaissance. The remainder of the detailremains with the firing battery until sent for, or proceedsto a rendezvous designated by the battalion commander. Thebattery detail must be close at hand when the reconnaissanceis completed so that it can commence at once to organizethe position selected, establish observation and communica-tion, compute firing data, and transmit or carry messagesto the firing battery.

18

Page 33: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 35-36

c. After receiving essential instructions from his battalioncommander (par. 42), the battery commander, accompaniedby the battery commander's party or some part of it, makesa detailed reconnaissance. During his reconnaissance, hecomes to a decision, based on the battalion commander'sorders, as to such of the following as are appropriate:

(1) Mission and method of laying.(2) Position of firing battery.(3) Routes of access and concealment for the battery in

approaching the position.(4) Time of occupation of position and of opening fire.(5) Location of observation and command posts.(6) Signal communication to be established.(7) Survey to be performed.(8) Positions of led horses, limbers (trucks or tractors),

and the maintenance section.(9) Construction of camouflage and protection of position.(10) Other necessary instructions to insure the prompt

opening of fire.

* 36. BATTERY COMMANDER'S ORDER.-a. The battery com-mander, having made his decision, gives orders to the recon-naissance officer and to the party for the occupation andorganization of the position. These orders may be givento the reconnaissance officer and party as a whole, but gen-erally appropriate parts of the orders are given separatelyto the individuals concerned.

b. The remainder of the detail is sent for, and instructionsrelative to bringing up the battery and placing it in positionare transmitted to the executive.

c. The orders of the battery commander should include abrief description of the situation, mission of the battery, per-tinent orders respecting points enumerated in paragraph 35,instructions concerning administrative details, and informa-tion as to the battalion aid station. Appropriate parts ofthis order should be communicated to the executive. In somecases, the battery commander may direct the executive orassistant executive to accompany the party, in which eventthe executive (assistant executive), after hearing the batterycommander's orders, returns to the firing battery and marchesit into position in accordance with the orders received.

19

Page 34: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

37 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

U 37. MEASURES PREPARATORY TO OCCUPATION.--C. As soon asthe orders of the battery commander have been issued, or-ganization of the position proceeds without delay. The re-mainder of the detail comes up, and work is started at onceto complete the establishment of observation and communi-cation and to perform the necessary survey. Prior to thearrival of the firing battery, firing data are computed andarrangements completed for the prompt opening of fire.

b. If the executive is not with the party, the battery com-mander usually sends back a member of the party to act asa guide and to transmit instructions to the executive rela-tive to the occupation of the firing position. For an approachto and occupation of position during darkness, the route andall details of movement should, when practicable, be deter-mined in advance by reconnaissance during daylight andmarkers posted before nightfall along the route to be followed.When the route to be followed is unusually difficult or haz-ardous, the battery commander himself may lead the batteryinto position. When the pieces are to be staggered, the posi-tion of each piece should be indicated to the gun marker,preferably by the use of a stake at each position. The useof stakes to mark piece positions is especially applicable tonight occupation of position. Where the battery is to occupya position in line at normal intervals, one man is posted tomark the position of the right (left) piece, after the exactposition has been selected, by standing at the fixed flank ofthe battery and facing in the direction of fire, one arm ex-tended in the direction of fire, the other in the direction ofthe line of pieces.

c. Under supervision of the reconnaissance officer, instru-ment personnel bring up the instruments, organize the obser-vation post, assist the battery commander in the preparationand tabulation of firing data, perform the necessary survey,and assist in the observation of fire and of the zone of fire.

d. Under supervision of the signal sergeant, signal person-nel establish, operate, and maintain signal communicationwithin the battery. The signal sergeant should reconnoiterexact routes for the wire lines, if time permits, and shoulddecide, if not already prescribed, whether the lines will belaid by battery reel or by hand. He meets the detail and

20

Page 35: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 37-38

transmits information and instructions as to the situation,positions of elements of the command, and signal communi-cation to be established.

e. When bringing the battery forward, the executive shouldride well in advance thereof so that he may have time tostudy the terrain and decide upon the best way to go intoaction without halting the battery. To avoid disclosing theoccupation by dust, movements in the neighborhood of amasked position should be made at a reduced speed (walk)unless speed is essential. If exposure at points in the routeof approach is unavoidable, such points should be passed ata rapid speed (gait), and, if necessary, by successive move-ments of vehicles. Exposed crests may be crossed by thebattery in line moving at an increased speed (gait).

:b 38. OCCUPATION AND SUBSEQUENT ORGANIZATION.-. Unnec-

essary movement of the pieces by hand should be avoided byselecting positions such that the pieces can be placed close toor in their positions before being uncoupled (unlimbered).When not well defiladed, a horse-drawn battery should ap-proach the position, if practicable, from the flank in doublesection column. Dismounting drivers and cannoneers ofhorse or horse-drawn units may facilitate the concealmentof the approach. The drivers should not be dismounted,however, if the battery is likely to come under fire. If thepieces are to be posted individually, the executive and chiefsof section precede the firing battery to the position. After theexact location for each piece is determined, each chief ofsection posts his piece individually; this is habitual in truck-drawn batteries.

b. As soon as the pieces (carriages) have been uncoupled(unlimbered), the first sergeant, who usually marches withthe firing battery, conducts the trucks (or limbers) to theposition designated for them and forms them to facilitateprompt movement and to take advantage of available coverand concealment. He supervises this position and insuresthat motor vehicles (or horses) are cared for and preparationsmade for further movement.

c. Antiaircraft weapons are disposed as prescribed by thebattalion commander for defense against low-flying airplanesand local attack by ground troops.

21

Page 36: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

38-39 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

d. While the battery is occupying position, the batterycommander completes all preparations for opening a timelyand effective fire. Initial firing data should be at the gunposition in the hands of the telephone operator or the gunmarker when the pieces arrive.

e. The signal sergeant with his signal personnel improvesthe initial system of signal communication by preparingalternate means (visual or messenger), placing lines on polesor trees where possible, providing concealment and cover forthe installations, establishing lateral lines when prescribed,and, in general, taking all steps to insure rapid and unin-terrupted communication within the battery.

f. The reconnaissance officer takes steps to develop andimprove the system of observation. Auxiliary observationposts are established when needed and arrangements madewith adjacent units with a view to possible use of theirobservation posts. Concealment and cover are provided forthe observers and arrangements are made for their reliefif the position is to be occupied for some time. The commandpost facilities and installations are improved and concealmentand protection provided. Messing of the detail, especially forindividuals on distant duties, is provided for. The recon-naissance officer continues the survey operations necessaryto assist the battery commander in the preparation andconduct of fire, in observation of the zone of fire, and inlocation of targets. The battery commander normally indi-cates the survey operations to be performed in conformitywith instructions of the battalion commander.

g. The executive, immediately upon establishing the piecesin position, makes all preparations necessary to expeditethe opening of fire. He continues organization of the posi-tion, which includes constant improvement for greater con-cealment and for protection against enemy fire, aircraft,ground troops, mechanized vehicles, and gas.

h. Reconnaissance is continued for the purpose of locatingroutes for probable movement, observation posts, commandposts, etc., and to gain additional information concerningthe enemy and the location of our own troops.

* 39. BATTERY OPERATING ALONE.-When a battery is em-ployed independently, reconnaissance and occupation of

22

Page 37: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 39-40

position are conducted in accordance with the same prin-ciples as when employed as part of a battalion. The bat-tery commander assumes the functions of the artillerycommander in addition to those properly his own. Undercertain circumstances, he may delegate a part of hisduties to a lieutenant when the necessity for close associa-tion with the commander of troops interferes with thebattery commander's performing his normal commandduties; Before a battery is detached, the battalion com-mander furnishes the battery with the necessary additionalcommunication and liaison personnel and equipment andwith an appropriate portion of the battalion ammunitiontrain.

U 40. CHANGE OF POSITION (DISPLACEMENT).-The usual

procedure of the battery in a forward displacement is asfollows:

a. The battalion commander informs the battery com-mander of the proposed movement and directs him toreport for reconnaissance.

b. The battery commander informs his executive of thedisplacement and gives him instructions for moving thebattery, including the route and a definite point beyondwhich the battery will not advance; informs his recon-naissance officer of the proposed movement and gives himinstructions relative to closing station and to future move-ments of the detail; and, with appropriate personnel fromhis party, reports to the battalion commander for recon-naissance.

c. The reconnaissance officer prepares the detail for theadvance and closes station at the time indicated. Whencircumstances permit, serviceable wire is recovered; if notrecovered immediately, it should, if practicable, be recoveredlater.

d. The detail, under the reconnaissance officer, then pro-ceeds to the designated point where it is met and thereconnaissance officer advised of the situation and givenhis instructions; thereafter, the detail proceeds to performits duties as heretofore described.

e. The executive causes the firing battery to be coupled(limbered) and marches it via the designated route until

23

Page 38: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

40-41 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

met by a guide or until he reaches the point previouslyindicated in his instructions. Reconnaissance and otherpreliminary work should be completed in time for thefiring battery to march to its position without halting andto open fire as soon as the position is occupied.

/. The procedure in a displacement to the rear is similarto that in a forward displacement. In general, in anadvance, the battery commander will go on reconnaissanceand the reconnaissance officer will close station and bringup the main part of the detail; in a withdrawal, thereconnaissance officer makes the reconnaissance, the bat-tery commander remaining with the battery or going wherehis presence is most needed.

g. When the battery commander knows in advance thathis battery will move but that the fire will be continuedfrom the present position for an indefinite period (as in thecase of a battalion advancing by battery), it will often beadvisable for him to send forward his reconnaissance officerwith a part of the detail to prepare the new position whilehe himself remains with the battery to conduct the fire.This advance party should strive to have a complete systemof command and observation established for the new positionbefore the battery arrives.

SECTION III

THE BATTALION

* 41. THE MARCH WHEN CONTACT IS PROBABLE.-a. No definiteformation for the battalion on the march, when contact withthe enemy is probable, can be prescribed. The battalion com-mander must give the necessary instructions in each case.Ordinarily, the "battalion detail" will march at the head ofthe battalion column. When no other artillery is present,the battalion commander with his party marches with thecommander of troops. Liaison sections may accompanysupported units.

b. Battery commanders with their parties march at theheads of their batteries, at the head of the battalion, or withthe battalion commander, as the latter may direct. Batterydetails (less battery commanders' parties) march with their

24

Page 39: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 41-42

batteries or, assembled in appropriate order, at the head ofthe leading battery.

c. When leaving the column, the battalion marches to itsposition as directed by the battalion commander.

d. Positions of battalion ammunition trains on the marchare prescribed by higher authority.

e. In case the supported troops are advancing in a par-tially deployed formation securing successive terrain lines,the artillery battalion may be divided into echelons, usuallytwo. Each echelon may move forward by bounds from posi-tion to position so as to have one echelon always in positionready to render effective support. The commander, with areduced party, normally marches with or near the com-mander of the supported troops. The remainder of thebattalion detail should be so conducted that it will be readilyavailable when needed, and when in a rendezvous, it will benear a suitable location for the battalion command post. Oneor both liaison sections, depending upon conditions, may beadvancing with the supported units or moving by bounds fromobservation to observation.

1 42. RECONNAISSANCE AND SELECTION OF POSITION.-a. The

battalion commander, assisted by appropriate members ofhis staff, makes a reconnaissance of the area assigned hisbattalion. In conformity with the tactical situation or ordersof higher authority, he comes to a decision as to the follow-ing, or so much thereof as is appropriate to the existingsituation:

(1) Battery missions, including-(a) Normal and contingent zones.(b) Minimum and distant range lines.(c) Fire missions, including registration and special fires.(2) Positions for batteries, including routes.(3) Liaison to be established.(4) Survey operations.(5) Firing chart, type to be used.(6) Ammunition allowances or rates of fire.(7) Organization of position for defense.(8) Ammunition supply and location of battalion ammu-

nition train.(9) Location of rear echelon and battalion aid station.

25

Page 40: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

42-44 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(10) Communication to be installed.(11) Observation.(12) Location of command post.b. The battalion commander, keeping in mind his mission,

examines the terrain and uses his staff and detail to the bestadvantage. The area within which the battery positionsare to be located is either assigned to the battalion by higherauthority or, under instructions, selected by the battalioncommander in accordance with the tactical plan. Batterypositions or areas are designated by the battalion commanderwith a degree of exactitude which will insure the accomplish-ment of subsequent fire missions. The battalion commandereither selects a position for the battalion ammunition trainor merely indicates its general location, leaving the selectionof the exact position to the commander of the ammunitiontrain. The battalion commander selects his own command-post area early and takes prompt measures to insure observa-tion of the dispositions and movements of the enemy. Hemay be accompanied on his reconnaissance by the batterycommanders, in which case he assigns them positions orareas for their batteries as soon as selected. If the batterycommanders or battery reconnaissance officers are not present,the battalion commander communicates, by means of anofficer if practicable, otherwise by means of the batteryagents, the necessary orders for occupation of the positionsselected. He may send for the battery commanders andcommunicate his orders in person either during or uponcompletion of his reconnaissance.

1 43. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDER.-The battalion com-mander's order should follow the sequence of the field-orderform. Where appropriate, it should be accompanied bytables, marked maps, or charts. (See par. 34 and ch. 6, pt.three.)

* 44. OCCUPATION OF POSITION.-Normally, the battalionshould be held closely in hand to facilitate control. Whenit is part of a larger force of artillery, the area assigned itwill be relatively small and the battalion commander haslittle latitude in placing his batteries. Within the battalionarea, batteries should be echeloned at least sufficiently to

26

Page 41: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 44-46

avoid presenting too compact a target. Occupation of theposition is conducted by the batteries as described in sectionII in accordance with the battalion commander's orders andunder his supervision.

* 45. SIGNAL COMMUNICATION (pt. two).-The battalion isresponsible for the establishment and maintenance of signalcommunication with its batteries, with the units supported,and with such other units on either flank as may be orderedby higher authority. As soon as the reconnaissance hasprogressed sufficiently to determine the lines to be laid andtheir routes and the radio installation needed, the communi-cation officer instructs the signal communication personnelrelative thereto and proceeds to establish the communicationsystem ordered by the battalion commander. Throughoutoccupation of the position, the communication officer con-tinues to perfect the system by laying new circuits, improvingexisting circuits, establishing alternate means, and providingconcealment and cover.

* 46. CHANGE OF POSITION (DISPLACEMENT).--A change ofposition by a battalion in general support, operating withother artillery, may be conducted by a simultaneous move-ment of batteries; if the battalion is in direct support, themove may be by battery. When the batteries of a battalionmove simultaneously, other artillery in position must takeover the missions and liaison functions of the displacing bat-talion during the movement. In an advance, the battalioncommander will ordinarily precede the batteries to selectand reconnoiter the position, taking with him his party andthe battery commanders with their parties. He may beginthis reconnaissance while his batteries are still firing, leav-ing his executive in charge. In a withdrawal, the battalioncommander will usually remain with his batteries, sending theexecutive to make the necessary reconnaissance. In general,the change of position is conducted in accordance with thedoctrine already described for the battery. When other ar-tillery is not present, the need for maintaining continuity offire will usually make it necessary to move by echelon. Recon-naissance should be made by the battalion commander orthe executive before or during the move of the first battery.

27

Page 42: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

46-49 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

The move should be so timed that at least one battery isalways in action. In case of a forward displacement, thebattalion commander should ordinarily be at his forwardcommand post by the time the first battery to move is inposition. In a withdrawal, the battalion commander ordi-narily remains at his command post nearer the enemy as longas any of the batteries can be controlled from that point, theexecutive making the necessary reconnaissance for thewithdrawal.

SECTION IV

THE REGIMENT

* 47. GENERAL.-The tactical functions of the regimentalcommander in relation to his battalions are, in general, analo-gous to those of the battalion commander in relation to hisbatteries. His exercise of fire direction is along broaderlines than that of the battalion commander, consisting usu-ally of the assignment of zones, missions, position areas, andat times specific targets or areas. It also includes coordina-tion of fires between battalions during displacement.

* 48. THE MARCH WHEN CONTACT IS PROBABLE.-a. Ordinarilythe regimental detail will march at the head of the regimentalcolumn. The regimental commander with his party may bewith the brigade commander; if the regimental commanderis the senior officer present, he, as artillery officer, will bewith the commander of troops. The regimental commandermay frequently require either the battalion commanders withtheir parties or the battalion reconnaissance officers with des-ignated individuals of battalion details to march with theregimental detail.

b. The regiment usually does not march into action as aunit. Subject to orders of higher authority, the regimentalcommander releases his battalions at such time and place aswill allow them to reach their positions most advantageously,considering time, security, and interference with other troops.

· 49. RECONNAISSANCE AND SELECTION OF POSITION.-Recon-naissance by the regimental commander is conducted alongthe same general lines as the reconnaissance by the battalioncommander. After making an assignment of areas to the

28

Page 43: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 49-53

battalions, either on the ground or from the map, it maybe desirable in some situations for him to make a more de-tailed reconnaissance of each area, accompanied by the bat-talion commanders in turn.

* 50. REGIMENTAL COMMANDER'S ORDER.--In moving situations,regimental orders are generally dictated or oral and are oftenfragmentary. They follow the usual field order form andare supplemented, whenever possible, by tables, diagrams,and marked maps or tracings; they do not cover routinefunctions. (See par. 34 and ch. 6, pt. three.)

1 51. SIGNAL COMMUNICATION (pt. two).-In the establish-ment and maintenance of signal communication the proce-dure (with obvious changes in the designation of units) is,in general, similar to that of the battalion.

* 52. CHANGE OF POSITION (DISPLACEMENT).-A change of po-sition is executed in the same general manner as describedfor the battalion. Normally the movement should be sotimed that not more than the equivalent of one battalionwill be out of action at one time. The method of movementwill frequently be influenced by the availability of roads.Movement may be either by battalion or by battery withineach battalion. When issuing orders for a change of posi-tion by battalion, the regimental commander must makesuch redistribution of missions as will insure that no essentialmission is neglected during the move.

SECTION V

THE BRIGADE (OR DIVISION ARTILLERY)

II 53. GENERAL.-a. The artillery brigade rarely marches intoaction as a unit; each regiment moves, usually by battalion(par. 48), under the direction of its respective commander.

b. Whether regimental areas are located by actual recon-naissance on the ground or whether they are selected froma map or air photo is governed by the time available. A com-bination of both map and ground reconnaissance should benormal when time permits. In covering the extensive bri-gade area, the brigade commander utilizes his staff to thefullest extent practicable.

238273°--40--3 29

Page 44: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

54-55 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

1 54. DIVISION ARTILLERY.-a. Reconnaissance.-During an

advance into action and in cases where the division com-mander makes a ground reconnaissance, the division artillerycommander, with some or all of his party, usually accom-panies the division commander.

b. Brigade detail.-(1) When the artillery is organized asa brigade, individual duties of members of the brigade detailcorrespond in general to those of a regimental detail. Marchformations should be such as to meet best the requirementsof the tactical situation.

(2) When the division artillery is not organized as a bri-gade, the members of the artillery section of division head-quarters perform the necessary operations, including meteor-ological and survey functions.

c. Artillery commander's order.-The artillery commander,as the division artillery officer, and his staff assist the staffof the division commander in preparing such parts of thedivision field order as relate to the employment of the ar-tillery. Based on this, the artillery commander issues hisorders. (See par. 35, and ch. 6, pt. three.)

d. Signal communication.-(1) When the artillery is organ-ized as a brigade, communication established by the brigadewith its regiments and associated units is similar, in general,to that established by the regiment with its battalions andassociated units.

(2) When the division artillery is not organized as a bri-gade, the division signal company is responsible for estab-lishing such communication as is necessary for the controlof the artillery.

e. Change of position (displacement) .-During an engage-ment, regiments may be moved simultaneously or a singleregiment may be moved as the tactical situation of the unitit is supporting may demand. A change of position by oneor more regiments does not, in itself, make necessary anyredistribution of missions by the artillery commander, sincethroughout the move, each regiment moving by echelon withinthe regiment carries on its assigned missions.

* 55. CORPS ARTILLERY.--The general fundamentals of em-ployment of a corps artillery brigade correspond to thatdescribed for the division artillery brigade.

30

Page 45: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 3

PROTECTION OF UNITS IN POSITION

(A more detailed treatment of the subject matter contained in thischapter is found in FM 5-15, FM 5-20, FM 6-130, and FM 21-40.)

ParagraphsSECTION I. Camouflage ___________________________________ 56-59

II. Field fortifications ------------------------- 60-64III. Defense against chemical attack, aircraft, and

ground troops ------------------------------ 65-68

SECTION I

CAMOUFLAGE

* 56. GENERAL.-a. Military camouflage is work done for thepurpose of deceiving the enemy as to the existence, nature,or location of materiel, troops, or military works. The bestcamouflage is that which makes the object appear as a partof its surroundings. All camouflage should be completedbefore the enemy observes or photographs the troops, ma-t6riel, or works to be protected. Deception of the enemy isgained by suppressing all signs of abnormal activity nearthe object or by deceiving the enemy as to the purpose ofsuch activity; rendering the object indistinguishable fromits surroundings; and making the object appear to be some-thing else.

b. The patterns formed on the air photo by the featuresof the terrain influence to a large degree the measures takentoward deception. Patterns are made by form, shadow, tex-ture, or color.

(1) Form is the most important element. Regular formsquickly attract the eye. Irregular forms of human originare lost in the irregular forms of the natural features.

(2) Shadow discloses form. The problem is one of con-cealing or reducing the shadow. Three possible solutions are!to take positions so that the shadows merge with existingshadows cast by features already on the terrain; to takeposition in such varied and broken terrain that the intricateand complex shadows already existing render it almost im-

31

Page 46: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

56-57 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

possible to discover anything abnormal; and to reduce theshadow by a gradual thinning of the camouflage materialtoward the edge.

(3) Texture in camouflage is a quality opposed to smooth-ness or polish. Grass and other vegetation possess thisquality to a marked degree; the longer it is, the darker itappears in a photograph; when pressed down by the feetor by the wheels of a vehicle, the amount of shadow is les-sened and it appears light in a photograph. A path whichis quite inconspicuous on the ground is obvious from theair and reproduces plainly on an air photo. If the textureof an area is uniform, satisfactory camouflage results aredifficult to attain because, while it is easy to match the color,it is impossible to match the grain or texture. ·If the textureis broken and varied, the camouflage blur will not be noticed.Good camouflage photographs as a blur.

(4) The color of the camouflage must be approximatelythe same as the surroundings since big differences in colorare picked up by the aerial observer and by modern panchro-matic emulsions and color films.

[ 57. SELECTION OF POSITION.-a. The proper selection of thebattery position is paramount in the effective value of cam-ouflage. Skillful use of natural overhead concealment com-bined with strict camouflage discipline will greatly reduceand may obviate the necessity for camouflage construction.

b. Batteries are usually disclosed on an air photo becausethe camouflage materials, especially the edges, are visible;guns are in line and spaced regularly; evidences of excavationappear; roads and trails lead to the battery; existing roadsand trails are more used near the battery and vehicles turnaround there, leaving characteristic marks; piles of ammuni-tion show; dugouts or bivouacs or perhaps kitchens are dis-cernible; slashings (felled trees) are made in woods wherethe pieces are located; and motor parts or limber and horselines can be identified. Guns ordinarily are easily concealedbut the above evidences are more difficult to hide. Theymust be broken up and caused to blend with existing marksin the area.

32

Page 47: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 57-59

c. Having reference to camouflage only, the following char-acteristics should be sought in the selection of batterypositions:

(1) Natural overhead cover should be available.(2) When there is no natural overhead cover, the area

should be one permitting ease of camouflage, such as brokenterrain, weeds, or brush (par. 9).

(3) They should afford means of access by existing roadsor trails.

(4) ,The positions should be capable of occupation with aminimum of disturbance of existing surroundings to avoidchanging the pattern of the area as revealed on an air photo.

(5) The area should be one not previously occupied byartillery or other military installations.

d. In the actual location of individual guns, the followingprecautions should be observed:

(1) Avoid regularity in spacing.(2) Guard against formation of blast marks by siting the

guns, whenever possible, so that they fire over roads, rail-roads, bare ground, or water. When it is impossible to avoidformation of blast marks, they should be camouflaged asdescribed in FM 6-130.

* 58. DISCIPLINE.-Next to the proper choice of position,camouflage discipline is the important factor in the effectivevalue of camouflage. It involves confining movements to des-ignated routes by wiring in roads and paths used; keepingblast marks constantly concealed; closing embrasures whennot firing; repairing or changing overhead material whennecessary; keeping men under cover or immobile when air-planes are overhead; keeping ammunition covered; and per-mitting no smoke to appear near the battery and no vehiclesto stop on the road near the battery during daylight or toturn around near it at any time.

* 59. CAMOUFLAGE OF POSITION.-a. Materials.-(1) The prin-cipal natural materials for camouflage include grass, weeds,foliage, branches, vegetation of all kinds, sod, debris, etc.They possess the texture of the locality and match surround-ings in color infrared panchromatic aerial photographs.

33

Page 48: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

59 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(2) The most important artificial materials are wire net-ting and fish net, both garnished with burlap, grass, or othermaterials in colors suited to the time of year and to the terrainwhere they will be used.

(3) For further discussion of camouflage materials, pro-cedure, and methods of construction, see FM 6-130.

b. Auxiliary elements.-(1) Observation posts.-These of-ten may be concealed successfully in such positions as oldbuildings, cellars, and trees. It is essential that the exteriorof loopholes is irregular in shape and that the light frombehind does not show through.

(2) Command posts.-These should be well camouflaged,traffic to them kept to a minimum, nearby vehicles screened,and telephone lines within a radius of 300 yards hidden toconceal their destination. This latter usually is accom-plished by having the wires follow natural ground lines,such as hedges, roadsides, and field lines.

(3) Motor parks (horse lines), kitchens, and bivouacs.-(a)These installations should be at such a distance from thefiring battery that they will not be affected by fire aimedat the guns. Where possible, the distance should be 500yards or more. The selected area should provide naturaloverhead cover, offer protection against shell fire and airand mechanized attack (sec. III), and be large enough topermit scattering elements.

(b) Tents and vehicles should be spaced irregularly,slashing of trees and underbrush should be avoided, paths(even those under trees) should be camouflaged.

(c) The spoil from excavations for personnel shelters,latrines, kitchen pits, etc., should be removed or camou-flaged.

(d) Whenever possible, bivouacs of other troops shouldbe at least 300 yards from artillery positions.

(4) Ammunition dumps.-Unless extreme precautions aretaken, ammunition dumps, because of their size and theheavy traffic around them, become very obvious on an airphoto. Dumps should be so located and built that they areaccessible, difficult to locate, offer a poor target from theair, and require only a small amount of pioneer work.Natural cover should be used as far as possible and piles

34

Page 49: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 59-61

should be kept low; regularity of piles and telltale turn-arounds in the vicinity should be avoided. (See ch. 2, pt.four.)

c. Dummy positions.-The factors of time and labor usu-ally preclude the erection of dummy positions. When theyare used, they must be constructed as faithful reproduc-tions. Poorly constructed fake installations are easily rec-ognized as such. Dummy positions should be placed 500or more yards from real positions because they attract at-tention to the area in which they are located.

SECTION II

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS

E 60. GENERAL.--a. Immediately upon the occupation of posi-tion, steps are taken to insure protection (cover and conceal-ment) for the pieces and for the men serving them. Thework is undertaken with the idea of future development andis progressive and continuous throughout occupancy.

b. Hasty field fortifications are those constructed of ma-terial available locally. Generally, they are constructed justprior to the placing of the pieces in position or immediatelyafter the positions are occupied.

c. Deliberate fortifications are of a semipermanent natureand are constructed when the tactical situation permits andsufficient time and material are available.

d. The doctrine outlined in section I is of great importancein considering field fortifications. It is axiomatic that fieldworks must be concealed.

e. Overhead cover for protection of pieces and the can-noneers while serving them from direct hits of artilleryprojectiles is not practicable. Protection against small-armsfire, shrapnel, and shell fragments can frequently be obtainedand should be provided whenever practicable.

f. Protection for signal communication installations is ofgreat importance.

* 61. EMPLACEMENTS (FIM 6-130).-a. Sunken emplace-ments.-An emplacement is sunken if the area on which thepiece rests is below the level of the ground. When the car-riage is lowered, the undisturbed earth around the excavation

35

Page 50: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

61 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

gives some cover to the men at the piece. Parapets aroundthe emplacement are easily built and give additional cover.Camouflage nets may be lowered. A suitable ramp for theremoval oft the piece from the emplacement must be provided.The advantages of sunken emplacements may be secured forhowitzers more easily than for guns because of their highangle of fire. In moving situations, there seldom is time forthe sinking of light artillery before opening fire, nor is theretime during lulls in the firing.

b. Trenches for cannoneers.-As soon as possible after theoccupation of position, or prior to the occupation when timepermits, work is started on narrow slit trenches for the can-noneers. These trenches may be dug during intervals infiring or at the first available opportunity. The trenches areso sited that the men can enter them promptly and also beready to return to their posts at a moment's notice. Theyare as close to the pieces as the service of the piece will permit.When trenches are dug, care is taken that they will notinterfere later with the trail when the direction of laying ischanged. A sufficient bank of solid ground is left between thetrail and the trench to sustain the thrust of the trail.Trenches should be offset if possible, so that a single hit maynot enfilade both trenches.

c. Parapets.-After the piece is in the firing position andnarrow trenches have been dug for the cannoneers, a parapetis thrown up around the piece to protect materiel and per-sonnel. In addition to giving some protection, the parapetgives the men a greater sense of security and has an effectori morale that increases the efficiency of the cannoneersunder fire. The height of the parapet should be not less than4 feet from the bottom of the emplacement. It should bemade splinterproof, which requires a thickness at the top ofat least 2 feet 6 inches.

d. Platforms.-When practicable and appropriate, plat-forms are built to support the pieces. They insure stabilityof the piece, facilitate a change of direction, increase accuracyof fire, and facilitate adjustment of fire. They are indis-pensable in soft or muddy ground and are usually constructedwhen a position is to be occupied for any considerable period.In a hasty position, they are improvised from materials

36

Page 51: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 61-64

found at the site or immediately available. Brush, logs,planks, or broken stone can be used for this purpose.

e. Trail supports.-Where appropriate, a trench for thetrail spade is dug immediately upon the occupation of posi-tion. For continuous firing, additional support must be giventhe spades. In a hasty position, the support consists of alog or timber set in the earth behind the spade to distributethe force of recoil transmitted through the trail. When timepermits, a more permanent support is built. (FM 5-15.)

* 62. COMMAND POSTS.-a. Hasty type (FM 6-130).-In ahasty position, the command post may consist of a trench tocontain the personnel if shell holes, other natural protection,or buildings are not available. The trench is dug deep enoughto give cover to the men occupying it and of sufficient lengthto accommodate the personnel required to use it. A trench3 feet deep with a parapet 1 foot 6 inches high gives coverto men in a sitting position. It is then made splinterproofby covering it with a layer of logs and at least 1 foot of earth.For continued occupancy, splinterproof compartments aremade in the side of the trench and the depth is increased.

b. Deliberate type (FM 5-15).-A bombproof structure isconstructed when time and available material permit.

* 63. OBSERVATION PosTs.-Concealment is practically theonly protection that can be provided in the early stages ofoccupation. If the observation post is on the ground, atrench is usually the first means of protection. (See FM6-130.) Later this may be made splinterproof by a coveringof logs and earth. As time permits, an observation post forti-fied against a 3-inch shell may be developed. Cover whichis proof against a 6-inch shell may be constructed in thevicinity for observation post personnel. (See FM 5-15.)

* 64. Shelter for personnel.-See FM 6-130 and FM 5-15.

37

Page 52: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

65 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

SECTION III

DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK, AIRCRAFT,AND GROUND TROOPS

* 65. DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK.-This subject iscovered- in detail in FM 21-40. Principal items in chemicaldefense of the battery are as follows:

a. Location of gas alarms and orders specifying their use.b. Posting of gas sentinels.c. Precautions to prevent contamination of food, water,

guns, ammunition, and other equipment.d. Location and preparation of gas shelters.e. Provision for decontamination of materiel and ground.f. Provision for first aid for gas casualties.g. Provision for protection of personnel and materiel in

case of air chemical attack.h. Preparation for rapid and safe movement to an alternate

position when ordered by the battery commander after attackwith persistent gas.

i. Preparation and dissemination of orders to apply gen-erally in case of gas attack, such orders to include at leastthe following:

(1) The designated alarm to be sounded immediately bythe gas sentinel when he detects gas or upon order of thegas noncommissioned officer.

(2) All personnel to adjust masks upon the sounding of thealarm, masks to be kept adjusted until ordered removed byan officer or noncommissioned officer.

(3) Gasproof shelters to be prepared for occupancy by put-ting out fires and open lights, lowering gasproof curtains, andoperation of collective protectors.

(4) All personnel not immediately needed at the guns orelsewhere to enter gasproof shelters and remain there untilordered to their duties.

(5) A gas sentinel to be posted at each gasproof shelterentrance to insure the correct use of blanket doors.

(6) All unnecessary movements to cease.(7) Fire missions to be fired without interruption except

in case of air chemical attack. In this case, unless the emer-gency demands that fire missions be continued, personnel not

38

Page 53: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 65-68

operating automatic rifles to seek cover under raincoats,paulins, or other overhead cover until the attack ceases.

(8) After a persistent gas attack, all contact with the con-taminated area to be avoided, except for specially equippedpersonnel, until decontamination has been completed.

(9) Decontamination supplies to be used under the directionof the gas noncommissioned officer.

* 66. PROTECTION FOR ARTILLERY IN POSITION.-Primarily, the

necessary protection for artillery in position is furnished bythe protection and security measures taken for the commandas a whole. However, artillery is equipped with certain auxil-iary weapons for its immediate protection.

* 67. DEFENSE OF POSITIONS AGAINST AIRCRAFT.-In the occu-pation of position by a battalion, each battery commandernormally places his automatic rifles in positions suitable forrendering immediate protection to the battery. As soon asthe battalion is in position, the battalion executive or otherdesignated staff officer coordinates the defense of the entirebattalion by placing the automatic rifles of the gun batteriesand headquarters battery in mutually supporting positionswith such assigned sectors of observation as will insure themaximum defense of the battalion area.

* 68. DEFENSE OF POSITIONS AGAINST GROUND TROOPS.-Re-

quirements for immediate protection for artillery in positionare met by the fire of the pieces themselves, by the pistol asan individual weapon, and by the automatic rifles of thebatteries. When the likelihood of mechanized attack is fore-seen, positions should be selected having natural obstaclessuch as a marsh, stream, cut, or woods in the most probabledirection from which attack may come. Artificial tank ob-stacles should be erected to supplement natural obstacles.Tank mines may be employed in connection with natural orartificial obstacles or in the open. When tank mines areemployed, care must be exercised to divert friendly trafficfrom the mined area.

39

Page 54: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,
Page 55: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

PART TWO

SIGNAL COMMUNICATION

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL

U 69. GENERAL.-a. This part deals with the basic doctrines,systems, and tactical employment of field artillery communi-cation. Technical details of training personnel in the instal-lation and operation of communication systems are containedin FM 24-5 and in pamphlets issued for use by the Army andthe Navy. Standard procedures in the training of personneland in the installation arid operation of communication sys-tems are essential in the Field Artillery to insure coordinatedaction with the other arms.

b. The commander of each field artillery unit is responsiblefox the establishment of signal communication within his ownunit, with supported and attached units, and with such otherunits as may be directed by higher authority. The executionof this function may be delegated to a subordinate in the samemanner as other tactical functions are delegated to subordi-nates and staff officers, but responsibility for the establish-ment and proper use of a signal communication systemremains wholly that of the commander.

c. Technical control of a system of signal communicationstandardizes the technical installation, operation, mainte-nance, and inspection of the various signal agencies of thecommand. It is a staff function exercised by authority ofthe commander.

d. Tactical control of a system of signal communicationInsures establishment of the necessary signal communica-tion between tactical units and development of the systemin accordance with the tactical plan. It is a commandfunction; responsibility rests with the commander.

e. The communication personnel of a field artillery unitis charged directly with the installation, operation, andmaintenance of signal communication as follows:

(1) To, but not including, headquarters of its next subor-dinate units.

41

Page 56: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

69-71 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(2) To, but not including, headquarters of the unit orunits it supports.

(3) To its observation post when established.(4) To its liaison officers and forward observers.(5) To local establishments.(6) To, but not including, headquarters of the corre-

sponding adjacent unit in accordance with instructionsfrom higher authority.

(7) To such other units as may be specifically prescribedby higher authority.

I. The Air Corps ordinarily will install, operate, and main-tain visual, radio, and other necessary communication ap-paratus in aircraft for communication between aircraft andground troops. The necessary wire communication betweenartillery units and Air Corps ground. sations is established byarrangement with the headquarters of which the artillery isa part.

* 70. OrFIcERs.--a. In artillery units, a communicationofficer is assigned by the commanding officer. In the gunand howitzer batteries, the reconnaissance officer acts ascommunication officer.

b. Except in a battery, a communication officer is both astaff officer and a headquarters battery commander. Inaddition to his command duties, he is responsible as astaff officer to his commanding officer for technical andtactical supervision of signal communication within subor-dinate units and for the maintenance of efficient signalcommunication within his own unit. He should be pre-pared to furnish his commanding officer with informationand advice on all questions affecting signal communication.

* 71. COMMAND POSTS.-a. General.-The forward echelon ofa headquarters constitutes the command post. It consistsof personnel and equipment immediately available to thecommander in the exercise of control of his unit. The termis frequently used to mean the area or locality in which arelocated the several establishments used by the commanderin the exercise of command of his unit. As commonly used,the term applies to battalion and higher headquarters, al-though in a limited sense it may apply to batteries.

42

Page 57: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 71-73

b. Movement.-The communication officer should be keptinformed of contemplated movements of the command postsof his own, superior, subordinate, and supported units. Suchtimely information permits him to make plans which willreduce to a minimum the attendant disruption of communi-cation. In the movement of a command post, the situationusually requires the installation of a communication systemat the new location while that in the old location. continues inoperation. The plan for a communication system, therefore,should designate the detail of men and the equipment to beutilized in case of a sudden move.

* 72. Axis oF SIGNAL COMMUNICATION.-When the movementof a command post can be foreseen, the probable successivelocations should be selected in advance. The axis of signalcommunication is designated by naming these successive loca-tions in the direction of movement. When the axis of signalcommunication for an artillery unit can be designated, it willusually follow that of the supported infantry unit. When itcannot be foreseen when and to what position area an ar-tillery unit will displace, it will be impracticable to designateits axis of signal communication. In such situations, thesubordinate unit will report its successive command postlocations as early as the tactical situation will permit of theirselection.

* 73. RECONNAISSANCE.-The communication officer shouldaccompany the commander on reconnaissance and make acareful study of the terrain and the plan of the commander.At the appropriate time, he should make such recommenda-tions regarding the communication system as are indicated bythe terrain and the tactical situation. The time required toinstall the communication system, its capabilities and limita-tions, and the difficulties of maintenance should be consid-ered by the communication officer in formulating his recom-mendations.

43

Page 58: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 2

MEANS OF COMMUNICATION

* 74. GENERAL.-The means of signal communication used inthe Field Artillery are wire (telephone and telegraph), radio(telephone and telegraph), messengers (motor car, motor-cycle, mounted, and dismounted), visual (lamps, flags, panels,and pyrotechnics), and sound (whistle, bugle, sirens, etc.).The primary means, except in mechanized artillery and forcommunication with aircraft, is wire.

[ 75. WIRE-The tactical situation dictates the wire systemto be installed. Time may require the simplest installationthat will give the desired communication but this system mustbe improved continuously, as time and available equipmentpermit, until the best possible system is in operation.

a. Installation of uire circuits.-(1) The primary consider-ations in the installation of a wire circuit are that it arrivesat its destination in working order and as quickly as possible.During laying of the wire, sufficient servicing to insure oper-ation of the circuit must be performed. Complete and thor-ough servicing and protection of the circuit should be com-pleted after the circuit is in operation.

(2) Prior to actual installation of a wire circuit, a recon-naissance should be made to locate a route which can betraversed by an available wire-laying device, which has coverfrom hostile observation and fire, is not subject to shell fire,is free from gassed areas, will make maintenance possible,and is free from friendly traffic.

(3) In general, circuits are installed in order of their im-portance to the commander.

(4) Trunk circuits and long local circuits should be laidwith wire-laying devices, while the short local circuits arelaid by hand.

(5) Every effort should be made to conserve personnel andequipment. In units equipped with two motor reels, bothreels should be used to make the installation. In units

44

Page 59: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 75

equipped with two horse-drawn reels, the installation shouldusually be made with one reel, the other reel being held inreadiness for a displacement. In units equipped with a motorreel and a horse-drawn reel, the motor reel should be usedfirst.

(6) In order to conserve wire for future needs and to se-cure rapidity of installation, decreased maintenance, and morereliable operation, wire circuits should be as short as possible.

(7) When wire crosses roads or trails, it should be buriedat least 6 inches or elevated at least 14 feet. Where espe-cially subject to shell fire, it should be buried or placed ina ditch.

(8) Wire should be tagged and tied at frequent intervalsalong the route, at bends in the road, at critical points (wherepassing under bridges or crossing over or under roads, rail-roads, etc.), and at its extremities.

(9) Wire should be laid with plenty of slack so that itwill lie loosely on the ground. To provide sufficient slackfor service and repair at critical points, several yards of wireshould be pulled from the reel, bundled, and tied to somesolid object.

(10) In estimating wire requirements from a map, the mapdistance plus 20 percent must be allowed for slack and wireties.

(11) Two or more circuits between the same two pointsshould be installed over different routes or separated fromeach other as much as possible.

b. Telephone centrals.--(1) A central should be locatedcentrally with respect to the activities it serves. It shouldbe protected, as far as practicable, from traffic, dampness,noise, and hostile fire. Switchboard operators should havesufficient privacy and protection to enable them to concen-trate fully upon their work. Protection from observation isnecessary so that lights may be used at night.

(2) Circuits to be terminated at a switchboard should bebrought to a central point. From that point to the switch-board they should be loosely cabled and elevated abovetraffic or buried.

c. Maintenance of wire circuits.-A unit is responsible formaintenance of all circuits connected to its switchboard.

238273 --40-4 45

Page 60: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

75-76 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

When a wire circuit becomes inoperative, linemen must besent out from each end of the circuit, working toward eachother as they test the circuit. Sufficient personnel shouldalways be on duty at a switchboard to repair any circuitsthat become inoperative. Constant supervision and a well-planned procedure for maintenance are vital and should beinitiated as soon as the wire circuits are installed.

d. Recovering wire.-In a change of position, when timepermits, serviceable wire is recovered, but in many casesit will be necessary to abandon it temporarily, recovering itlater as time permits. In recovering wire, it should be in-spected, repaired, and tested so that it will be ready for use.

e. Telegraph.-Telegraph communication is employedbetween the artillery brigade (or the division) and each ofits regiments and between the regiment and each of itsbattalions. It provides direct communication between head-quarters for the transmission of written messages. It isaccomplished by superimposing the telegraph circuit overthe telephone circuit by a method known as simplexing.Both telephone and telegraph communication may be usedover a wire circuit at the same time without mutual inter-ference. In transmission, the International Morse Code isused and the general provisions of radio, procedure arefollowed. Telegraph instruments operate on direct currentand the messages transmitted cannot be picked up by groundintercept stations. Messages may be sent in clear text.

* 76. RADIO.-Radio is the primary means of communicationfor mechanized artillery and between observation aircraftand ground stations. For all other purposes, radio is a sec-ondary means used to supplement wire communication andmessenger service. Radio may be used prior to the installa-tion of wire communication or during its interruption. Radiomay be used under conditions which prohibit the installationand maintenance of wire.

a. Limitations.-Radio equipment does not provide secretcommunication. Messages may be intercepted with equalfacility by friendly and hostile stations. This necessitatesthe utmost care in the maintenance of radio security. Theapproximate number and types of radio stations can bedetermined by hostile intercept. The location of radio sta-

46

Page 61: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 76

tions may be determined by enemy position-finding radiostations. From this information and a knowledge of ourradio systems, the enemy may readily estimate the organiza-tion and location of the artillery in a given area. Unlesschannel assignments are carefully planned and frequenciesare rigidly adhered to by each station, stations may interferewith each other. The enemy may cause our stations toaccept erroneous or misleading information, instructions, ororders. A hostile station may obstruct the use of certainchannels. These limitations may necessitate "radio silence"during a period when important preparations are being madeor certain operations are executed.

b. Radio nets.--In order that radio communication mayfollow the proper tactical channels of command, the radiostations of an artillery unit and radio stations of subordinateunits, or two or more stations within the unit, may be groupedtogether for operation. Groups thus formed are termed radionets. On a functional basis the nets are classed as follows:

(1) Tactical nets.-Brigade nets and regimental nets whosenormal function is the transmission and reception of tacticalmessages.

(2) Liaison and foroard observer nets.-Those nets whichtransmit and receive messages between artillery liaison offi-cers or forward observers and the batteries or the battalioncommand post.

(3) Air-ground nets.-Those nets whose normal functionis the transmission and reception of messages having to dowith the surveillance and air observation of artillery fires.

c. Radio systems.-The radio stations and radio nets overwhich an artillery unit has control comprise the radio systemof that unit.

d. Net-control station (NCS).--In every net, one of thestations is designated the net-control station. The NCS isdharged with maintaining the net on the assigned frequencyand keeping order within the net. The authority of the NCSextends only to the operation of the net on the air. In noway is it concerned with the interior administration of anystation, its tactical operation, or its movement. Within itssphere, however, the authority of the NCS is absolute and itsorders will be strictly obeyed. The NCS designation is given

47

Page 62: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

76-77 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

to the station of the senior organization in the net or to astation so located that it can be under the direct control ofthe officer or the noncommissioned officer responsible for theoperation of the radio nets within the organization. All otherstations in the net are known as secondary stations.

e. Frequencies.-Each radio net is assigned a definite fre-quency, sometimes referred to as a channel or dial setting,upon which to operate, and each station is assigned a callsign. All frequencies and call signs are normally assigned toan artillery unit by the signal operation instructions of thedivision or higher headquarters.

f. Operation.-Methods of establishing communication,use of procedure signs and signals, and procedure of trans-rnitting messages are prescribed in pamphlets used by theArmy and the Navy. The abbreviated form procedure de-scribed therein for the transmission of field messages will beused by all artillery units. Operating regulations and gen-eral procedures are prescribed in FlM 24-5.

g. Records.-All messages received by a radio station will becopied in duplicate except messages having to do with firedirection, which may be relayed orally to the individual con-cerned. A radio station log may be kept at each radio sta-tion. The station log and any other records connected withthe operation of the station for the radio day (midnight tomidnight) will be turned over to the unit communicationofficer for disposition.

* 77. MESSENGER.--. Messengers are employed by all unitsas required. Certain individuals are designated as messen-gers, and as far as practicable, provide this service for theirunit, but all communication personnel are trained in thedelivery of written and oral messages and may be so employed.

b. Messengers generally are used when other signal means,fail, when distances are, so short that this means is the mostrapid fagey, or when the character of the message precludesthe use of other means.

c. Messengers are classified according to the type of servicerendered, as special and scheduled messengers, and accordingto the type of transportation used, as motorcar, motorcycle,mounted, and dismounted.

48

Page 63: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 77-80

d. While not exclusively a messenger, an agent is fre-quently used to carry orders and messages. He is a speciallyselected noncommissioned officer sent from each unit to thenext higher commander and employed by that commanderto carry orders and information, both written and oral, to hisown unit, to act as a guide, and in general to maintain con-tact between the two commanders.

* 78. VISUAL.--a. Visual communication is unsuited for thetransmission of long messages but is well suited for trans-mitting prearranged signals and short code groups such asthose of the Fire Control Code. In gun and howitzer bat-teries, flags are particularly valuable for the transmission offiring commands when wire communication has not yet beeninstalled or has been interrupted. Over short distances, armsmay be used in place of semaphore flags.

b. Visual signaling should not be used when it is likely todisclose a position or to draw fire on other troops or whenthe signals may be read by the enemy. Accordingly, greatcare must be exercised in the establishment of visual sta-tions, especially those signaling from rear to front. Theseconsiderations, therefore, often preclude two-way visualcommunication.

* 79. VOICE.-Voice communication is used principally be-tween the observation post and the guns of a battery, andbetween the observation post of a battalion and those ofits batteries. It is thus used to supplement wire and, par-ticularly in fast-moving situations, may replace it.

* 80. MESSAGE CENTER.-a. The message center is an estab-lishment at all command posts charged with the transmis-sion, reception, and delivery of messages from and to theheadquarters of the unit. It provides a fixed locality towhich messengers or messages may be sent and provides co-ordination of the use of the various means of signal com-munication. (FM 24-5.)

b. Personnel required to operate the message center variesupward from one clerk, depending upon the traffic to behandled. Duties of a message center chief, messenger dis-patcher, code clerk, messengers, and operators are outlined

49

Page 64: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

80-81 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

in FM 24-5. . All message center personnel are trained toperform all duties incident to message center operation.

c. Message center procedure is not dependent on forms.No equipment other than pencil, paper, authorized codes,and the cipher device are required. Certain forms, such asdelivery list, message center log, field message book, andmessage envelope may be provided for convenience.

d. The message center keeps only such records as arerequired to insure rapid and accurate handling of messages.The following records are usually kept:

(1) Message center log.-A combined record of service-ability of the various means of signal communication and anumber sheet. The record of serviceability shows the timeeach means of signal communication was established, timeeach means was out of operation, and time communicationwas reestablished. The number sheet shows the messagecenter number of each outgoing message and indicates thosefor which a receipt has been obtained. A new series of num-bers begins at midnight each day. At midnight, the messagecenter log is closed out and turned over to the individualresponsible for keeping the unit journal.

(2) Live file.-The live file consists of a duplicate or skele-ton copy of each outgoing message which has been turnedover to a signal agency for transmission but for which areceipt has not yet been obtained.

e. Duplicate or skeleton copies of all receipted outgoingmessages, receipted delivery lists or message envelopes, andreceipted duplicates of all clear text copies of all incomingmessages are turned over to the individual at a headquarterscharged with keeping the unit journal.

f. The following messages do not pass through the messagecenter:

(1) Those pertaining to immediate fire missions.(2) Those transmitted directly from the originator to the

addressee in person, by telephone or postal service, or byspecial messenger directed by the originator.

(3) Those authorized by the commander to be sent directlyfrom originator to transmitting agency.

I 81. CODES AND CIPHERS.--a. Codes and ciphers are em-ployed by the Field Artillery for secrecy and brevity. When

50

Page 65: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 81

likelihood of hostile intercept exists, the Division Field Code,Air-Ground Liaison Code, Map Coordinate Code, PyrotechnicCode, and M-94 Cipher Device are used. The Fire ControlCode and Meteorological Code provide brevity in transmittingand recording fire commands, firing data, and meteorologicaldata sent by radiotelegraph.

b. When danger of hostile intercept exists, all messagesmust be placed in a confidential code or cipher except in thefollowing cases:

(1) In emergencies, commanders or their authorized rep-resentatives may direct that a message be transmitted inclear text. Such messages must be of no military value tothe enemy or they must be so urgent that the speed of trans-mission outweighs the value of the information to the enemy.Messages of this type must be written and marked "Send inclear" over the signature of the commander or his authorizedrepresentative before they will be accepted by a transmittingagency. (FM 24-5.)

(2) Firing commands and firing data may be sent in cleartext.

(3) Prearranged messages may be used when their mean-ings are known only to the individuals concerned and arechanged frequently. Use of prearranged messages is subjectto the general rules for employment of codes and ciphers.

51

Page 66: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 3

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS OF FIELD ARTILLERYUNITS

ParagraphsSECTION I. Infantry division artillery----___-- ______________ 82-92

II. Cavalry division, corps, and army artillery________ 93-95

SECTION I

INFANTRY DIVISION ARTILLERY

A 82. GENERAL.-- . The tactical situation dictates the com-munication system to be installed. The decision as to whattype of communication system will be employed is a com-mand decision, responsibility for which rests wholly withthe commander. However in most situations, recommenda-tions of the communication officer should be sought by thecommander. In planning a signal communication system,it must be constantly borne in mind that no one means ofsignal communication can ever be considered infallible;appropriate alternative means must be immediately avail-able, if not in actual operation.

b. A battery signal communication system should providefor the simultaneous transmission, without interference, oftwo general types of commands and orders as follows:

(1) Firing commands, which are transmitted directlyfrom the battery observation post or command post to theguns.

(2) Fire directions, such as the designation of targets,which are transmitted from the battalion observation postor command post to the battery observation post, commandpost, or directly to the guns. Other tactical and adminis-trative orders and instructions also are transmitted overthis channel.

c. Each battalion communication system must be plannedso that communication will not be interrupted during dis-placement, thus insuring continuous close support of the.infantry. The system must be such that forward or air

52

Page 67: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 82-83

observers can report targets quickly to the battalion com-mander and, if necessary, observe, adjust, or actually con-duct the fire of single batteries or the battalion as a whole.Every facility must be placed at the disposal of the battalioncommander for the direction of fire on proper targets atappropriate times.

d. The communication systems in the regiment and thebrigade are similar to those in the battalion. Visual sig-naling has little application and seldom is used.

e. When an artillery regiment or higher unit is increasedby the addition of attached units, tactical control andsignal communication are facilitated by the formation oftemporary units, each composed of several organic or at-tached units under a single command.

(1) Regardless of the amount and types of attached ar-tillery, the communication system for the organic unitshould remain the basic system but should be expanded tohandle increased traffic. The entire system must remainunder control of the superior organic unit.

(2) Since the commander of a groupment or subgroupmentexercises complete tactical control within the groupment orsubgroupment, he is responsible for communication therein.

U 83. BATTERY WIRE SYSTEMS.-The' battery wire system mustbe such that the collective communication system will providefor adjustment of fire by the best available form of observa-tion. A battery acting as part of a battalion must installthe wire system prescribed by the' battalion commander.However, the system prescribed by the battalion commanderrepresents the minimum installation required by the battalionand does not prevent the battery commander from installingadditional circuits if he so desires. A battery acting alonemay install any wire system. which will permit its fire to beconducted properly. In many cases where a battery is actingalone, its wire system may consist initially of a single wirecircuit between the gun position and observation post.

a. Circuits to switchboards at gun positions (observationposts) (figs. 1 and 2).-The most flexible wire system for afiring battery consists of a switchboard with two wire circuitsfrom it to the gun position and two wire circuits from it to theobservation post. The switchboard may be installed in the

53

Page 68: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

83 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

vicinity of the observation post or gun position, dependingon the particular situation, location of the battalion com-mand post, and length of the wire circuit from the battalionto the battery switchboard. The decision is made by thebattalion commander and announced in his order; as, "Cir-cuits to switchboards at gun positions," or "Circuits to switch-boards at observation posts." Either statement indicates tothe battery commander the location at which his switchboardwill be installed and requires two circuits to the gun positionand two to the observation post. In organizations equipped

Conduct-of-firecircuit to OP

CommandConduct-of-fire circuitcircuit to GP

iii .7/ T 6Battolion circuit

Fire-directioncircuit to GP

Laid by battery------ Laid by battalion

FIGURE 1.-A battery wire system (battery equipped with switch-boards not having repeating coils).

NoTE.-The switchboard may be at the gun position or at theobservation post as prescribed in the battalion order.

with switchboards having repeating coils, the battalion wirecircuit is simplexed and direct ground return telephony isemployed between the battalion command post and the bat-tery gun position. This ground return circuit replaces thefire direction circuits otherwise installed from the switchboardto the gun position (fig. 2).

b. Circuits to gun positions (observation posts) .- In somesituations, it may be undesirable or impossible to have one ormore of.the batteries install a switchboard. In such a situa-

54

Page 69: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 83-84

tion, the battalion commander would prescribe, "Circuits togun positions," or "Circuits to observation posts," in his order.The battery would then install a single wire circuit betweenits gun position and its observation post and would have atelephone operator available at the indicated terminus ofthe battalion circuit.

c. Forward observation.--When it becomes necessary fora battery to displace its observation, wire communicationshould be established to the new observation post either byextending one of the circuits from the old observation post

Conduct-of-firecircuit to OP

CommandConduct-of-fire circuit

circuit to GP

Phi _Y >sBattalion circuit

Fire-directioncircuit to GP(direct ground-return

Laid by battery telephony to the--- Laid by battalion battalion command post)

x Repeating coil

FIGmRE 2.-A battery wire system (battery equipped with switch-boards having repeating coils).

or by installing a new circuit from the switchboard or the gunposition.

* 84. WIRE SYSTEMS IN LIGHT BATTALIONS.-a. Generali-(1)The initial wire system installed by a field artillery battaliondepends on the immediate wire needs of the commander. Itmust be such that some reliable means of communication isavailable for placing the fire of one battery or the entirebattalion on a target and for communication to the supportedunit. Targets may be observed by liaison officers, battalion

55

Page 70: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

84 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

observers, or battery observers. Some reliable means of com-munication, preferably telephone, must be available betweenthe command post and battalion and battery observers, andbetween the command post and firing batteries:

(2) Wire circuits between the command post and the firingbatteries are the most critical circuits of the battalion wiresystem. Since they are not usually supplemented by radiocommunication as are the circuits to observers, reliance mustbe placed entirely upon them. They should be the first cir-cuits installed when the battalion occupies position and everyeffort should be made to keep them as short as possible.

(3) To give flexibility to the wire system, an artillery bat-talion normally installs a switchboard (telephone central)in the command post area, and connects all wire circuits ofthe system into it. A second switchboard (switching central)may be installed somewhere in the wire system when it isneeded to save wire or to add to the flexibility of the system.Its use in the battalion, however, should be rare.

(4) A field artillery battalion invariably installs a wirecircuit to the switchboard of the supported infantry unit orto the switchboard of the supported or reinforced field artil-lery unit, even though their command posts are together.

(5) Wire circuits are installed to liaison officers with frontline infantry battalions. Each circuit is a local circuit andterminates at a telephone at the position of the liaison officer.It is not connected into the infantry switchboard. It maybe necessary to designate a point to which the battalion wiresection will lay the circuit and beyond which the liaisonsection will lay it; or it may be necessary to delay installationuntil nightfall. Two telephones and at least 1 mile of wireshould be carried by each liaison section, so that the liaisonsection may extend the liaison wire circuit forward as theliaison officer advances with the Infantry. If radio or visualcommunication is being used between the liaison officer andthe battalion, it may be necessary to leave the radio or visualstation in a concealed position while the liaison officer movesto a position from which he can observe. The two telephonesand the wire may then be used to communicate between theliaison officer and his radio or visual station.

56

Page 71: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 84

b. The system.-The wire system of a battalion should con-sist of a switchboard installed in the command post area,trunk circuits to the batteries and to the supported unit, andlocal circuits to the liaison officers, forward observers, andcommand post installations as required by the particularsituation. If a battalion observation post is established, twocircuits should be installed to it from the switchboard. Thenumber of local circuits in the command post area dependson the needs of the commander but should always include one

Commandingofficer (6)To BtryA

Messagecenter (ID To Bty B ToBtry C

To regiment(laid by regiment)

Fire directionand radio Fire direction~Tg~ E M Fire direction

and radioI ujv Radio set7 Ropder atg in

regimental net

PIGuaE. 3.-Example of local circuits in a battalion command postarea (organizations equipped with switchboards not having re-peating coils).NoTE.-A local circuit may be installed to the air-ground radio

set if it is located at the battalion command post.

circuit to the location of the commander and sufficient cir-cuits to provide for proper fire direction of the entire bat-talion (fig. 3). In organizations equipped with switchboardshaving repeating coils, the circuit to each battery is simplexedfor ground-return telephony between the battery and thecommand post. When such an installation is made, not morethan two metallic circuits need to be installed for fire direc-tion (fig. 4). Figure 5 shows an example of the wirecommunication installed in a light battalion.

57

Page 72: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

84 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

c. Alternative wire systems.-(1) In some situations, it maybe impossible or undesirable to have one or more of the bat-teries install a switchboard. The battalion may install thecircuits from its switchboard direct to the gun positions orto the observation posts. Such a system is indicated by thestatement, "Circuits to gun positions," or "Circuits to observa-tion posts," in the battalion commander's order.

(2) If it is necessary to install a battalion wire systemand switchboards are not available, the initial installation

To Btry A

(6) To Btry B To Btry C

To regiment //

Fire direction

T9

FGURIE 4.-Example of local circuits in a battalion command postarea (organizations equipped with switchboards having repeatingcoils).

NOTE.-A, B, and C are telephones directly connected by groundreturn circuits to the gun positions of batteries A, B, and C, respec-tively. These telephones may be located at any radio station orconvenient to the staff as required and must be used only for firedirection. When the telephone operator at A calls, the operator atbattery A gun position answers.

A local circuit may be installed to the air-ground radio set ifit is located at the battalion command post.

may consist of direct wire circuits between the battalion com-mand post and the gun positions. Such an installation isindicated by the statement, "Direct circuits," in the battalioncommander's order.

(3) The situation may indicate some combination of thewire systems enumerated. One battery may be directed to

58

Page 73: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 84

LnO LnO

iA*' i'

~\ \ I/ / ~ ~ Supportedinfantry

centeCommandingofficer (6)

Fire direction

Laid by batteriesLaid by battalion

.... Laid by regiment

FIGURE 5.-Example of wire communication installed in a lightbattalion.

NoTE.-The regimental wire circuit is simplexed for telegraphcommunication. A local circuit may be installed to the air-groundradio set if It is located at the battalion command post. Organiza-tions equipped with switchboards having repeating coils may sim-plex circuits for ground return telephony as indicated in figures2 and 4.

59

Page 74: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

84-88 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

install a switchboard while another may have the battalioncircuit installed to its observation post or to its gun position.However, the system should be improved as time and equip-ment permit.

* 85. WIRE SYSTEMS IN MEDIUM BATTALIONS.-The principlesprescribed for the light battalion are with obvious modifica-tions applicable to medium battalions. A medium battalionusually establishes liaison communication with the light ar-tillery unit which it supports by reinforcing fires. It installsa wire circuit from its switchboard to the switchboard ofthe light unit, and the liaison officer uses the switching facili-ties of the light unit for communication to his battalion.

* 86. REGIMENTAL WIRE SYSTEM.-The wire system of a fieldartillery regiment consists of trunk wire circuits to its sub-ordinate units and to the supported infantry unit, and suchlocal circuits as are required at the regimental commandpost. A switchboard is always installed in the command postarea. Switching centrals are rarely used. The wire circuitsto subordinate units and to the artillery brigade (or division)are simplexed for telegraph. Figure 6 shows a wire systemof an artillery regiment.

* 87. BRIGADE WIRE SYSTEM.--. When the artillery is organ-ized as a brigade, the wire system consists of trunk circuitsto the regiments and such local circuits as are required in thecommand post area. Two circuits are installed to the brigadeswitchboard by the division. The brigade invariably installsa switchboard in order to interlace the infantry and artillerywire systems. A switching central may be installed in abrigade wire system to increase the flexibility of the systemor to save wire. However, when a switching central is in-stalled, special arrangements must be made for bridging thecircuits around it in order to have telegraph communicationto the regiments.

b. When the division artillery is not organized as a brigade,the division signal company lays such signal communicationas is necessary for control of the artillery.

* 88. GROUPMENT WIRE SYSTEMS.-When groupments areformed, the headquarters of the groupment commander in-

60

Page 75: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 88

stalls wire communication with each subgroupment or sub-ordinate unit, of the groupment. In many cases, the attachedunits because of lack of time are unable initially to installextensive wire systems. It then becomes necessary for theorganic units to install not only the circuits normally requiredfor communication to the attached units, but also those

\ i'

Local circuitsas required

L aid by regiment./~ ----- Laid by brigade

.... Laid by a supportingTo brigade medium battalion

x Simplexed fortelegraphy

FIGURE 6.-A regimental wire system, 75-mm, in a sqlare infantrydivision.

necessary for communication within the attached units. Thisis done prior to the arrival of the attached units. Figure 7illustrates a wire communication system within a groupment.Frequently, in attack, the attached artillery remains in posi-tion and takes over the missions of the organic artillery whenit displaces. To permit this to be done smoothly and without

238273'--40--5 61

Page 76: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

88-89 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

interruption, it is desirable that their command posts betogether and the command post installations be duplicated.

* 89. TACTICAL RADIO NETS.-a. The brigade and regimentalnets shown in figure 8 (or the nets of the division artillerywhen it is not organized as a brigade) are usually placed inoperation prior to installation of the wire systems., Afterinstallation of the wire systems, these nets must be availableto supplement wire communication and to provide communi-cation during interruption of wire communication. Whennot in continuous operation, the nets are checked at scheduledintervals of time to insure their continued functioning. Radio

Subgroupment Subgroupment

/ I \

. / i C901 / 01

\ S901 /

/ \

FIGURE 7.--A wire system for a groupment of light artillery in asquare infantry division.

operators when not operating in the radio net are used tooperate the telegraph instruments simplexed on the wirecircuits. When the wire circuits are in operation, wire-tele-graph communication should be used in preference to radiocommunication.

b. Tactical nets are normally operated free but the NCS, ifit is unable otherwise to maintain proper control, may ordera change to directed net operation at any time.

c. Whern division artillery is not organized as a brigade, theartillery regiments are in a radio net with division head-quarters.

62

Page 77: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 90

* 90. LIAISON AND FORWARD OBSERVER NETS.-a. The use ofradio by liaison officers and forward observers for communi-cation with the battalion command post and the firing bat-teries is of primary importance to the Field Artillery.

b. It is essential that the radio station of the observer isin direct communication with a radio station which is eitherat a battery or in direct telephone communication with abattery.

c. Unless the firing batteries are equipped with radio sets,it should be habitual under the following conditions for the

\ /

MJLight Medium Light

S C

FIGURE 8.-Tactical radio nets of the brigade and the regiment ina square infantry division.

battalion to furnish them with radio sets, operators, and afrequency upon which to operate:

(1) When a battery is detached from the battalion andoperating with a security detachment.

(2) When it is impracticable for the battery to install andmaintain wire circuits to battery observers in forward areas.

d. Typical liaison and forward observer radio nets of thelight battalion are shown in figure 9. The type and numberof nets in operation depend upon the number of liaison orforward observers required by the situation, availability of

63

Page 78: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

90 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

frequencies upon which to operate, number and character-istics of the available, radio sets, and typical dispositions ofthe battalion.

Forward Forwardobserver Forward observer

observer Liaison

Liaison officerofficer

6\ \ , /

Forwardobserver Forward

Liaison observerLiaison

c\ \ officer

\I

PIGURE 9.--Examples of liaison and forward-observer nets.

e. The control of artillery fire by radio requires a proceduredesigned for economy of time. When two stations are knownto be within easy radio range of one another, it is unnecessary

64

Page 79: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 90-92

to include any routine procedure which obviously slows thedelivery of fire.

* 91. AIR-GROUND NETS.---a. The air-ground net of an artil-lery brigade includes the brigade station (NCS), the battalionstations, and such airplanes as may be operating with thebrigade (fig. 10).

b. When division artillery is not organized as a brigade,air-ground radio communication for control of air observa-tion and adjustment of artillery fire will be essentially asprovided for the brigade except that the two artillery regi-mental command posts will be in the air-ground net. When

X,Y,orZX.Y\orZ I

~\ J ~~~ju F iH Light battalions

W/ /\ v \ r dx / Medium battalions

Advancedlanding field ZNCSor airdrome

FIGURE 10.-An air-ground radio net, square infantry division.

decentralized control is appropriate, particularly when re-inforcing artillery is present, two artillery air-ground netsmay be established with the net control stations at theartillery regimental command posts; one net normally willcomprise the general support artillery.

c. The procedure used in control of artillery fire by airobservers is similar to that for liaison and forward observers.

* 92. RADIO SYSTEMS IN GRouPMENTs.-Regardless of theamount and types of attached artillery, the radio nets de-scribed herein for the organic artillery should remain the

65

Page 80: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

92-94 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

basic system. A limited number of noninterfering radiochannels are available in a given area. Tactical nets shouldbe employed between groupments and subgroupments andbetween subgroupments and battalions as described for bri-gade and regimental nets. In most situations, liaison andforward-observer nets are limited by the allowable densityfor noninterfering channels in the area. The allowable den-sity is dependent upon the types of radio equipment used forthat purpose. There will usually be restrictions upon thenumber of stations which can be handled in the air-groundnet. Since practically all air-ground missions are fired bymedium artillery, the light battalions usually are the onesso restricted.

SECTION II

CAVALRY DIVISION, CORPS, AND ARMY ARTI IJERY

* 93. CAVALRY DIVISION ARTILLERY.-In general, the doctrinesof signal communication are the same as for the correspond-ing units of the organic artillery of an infantry division.Because of the relatively short time ordinarily available forinstallation, the wire circuits are usually comparatively shortand are limited to those absolutely necessary. Other meansof communication are frequently used, especially visual sig-naling and radio. Communication between the artillery regi-ment and the command post of the division normally is'established by the division. An artillery battalion, whenattached to or in direct support of a cavalry brigade, normallyestablishes communication with such brigade.

* 94. CORPS ARTILLERY.-Ca. The corps lays the necessary cir-cuits to the command posts of the corps artillery brigadeand of corps artillery units not a part of the brigade. Thetelephone communication of a corps artillery brigade corre-sponds in principle to that of a division artillery brigade.

b. Corps artillery units, when placed in support of or giventhe mission of reinforcing the fires of divisions or lower units,lay circuits to the command posts of those units.

c. The observation (sound-and-flash) battalion lays cir-cuits to the command posts of the units which it serves orobtains communication with them through the corps.

66

Page 81: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 95

A 95. ARMY ARTILLERY.-For heavy field artillery units re-tained under army control, the doctrines of signal communi-cation and the means available are similar to those of corre-sponding units of the corps artillery. Units of army artillerydo not establish direct telephone communication with divi-sions or lower units. When assigned missions in direct sup-port of a corps, direct telephone communication is establishedwith the corps artillery officer or with the corps artillerybrigade, according to circumstances. Communication maybe established with subordinate units of corps artillery whenclose coordination of fire renders such communication neces-sary or desirable.

67

Page 82: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,
Page 83: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

PART THREE

TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL

* 96. ARTILLERY TACTICS.-Artillery tactics is the art of dis-posing artillery troops, mat6riel, ammunition, and means ofsignal communication in the presence of the enemy, andthe directing of artillery fire in combat so as to carry outmost effectively the mission assigned.

[] 97. CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY.--a. General.-(1) Field Artillery is an army of relatively long-range combat.Fire is its sole means of combat. It contributes to the move-ment of the entire force through the fire support whichit renders other arms; its own movement is to insure thissupport.

(2) Artillery fire possesses great power of destruction andneutralization. It is the principal means of attack againstmaterial objectives. Its curved trajectories enable fire toreach personnel defiladed against flat trajectory weapons orprotected by ordinary overhead cover. The wide radius ofeffect of artillery projectiles compels hostile troops in theopen to move in widely deployed formations. Artillery firealso produces great moral effect.

(3) Artillery fire possesses a high degree of flexibility.Field Artillery is thus capable of intervening over a zone ofgreat width and depth and of rapidly shifting and concen-trating its fire in accordance with the situation withoutchanging its positions. This characteristic makes it possibleto concentrate the fire of large masses of Field Artillery undera common fire direction. Such heavy concentrations offire are, under certain conditions, capable of being directedwith annihilating effects against critical objectives in thezone of combat. Through maneuver of artillery fire, highercommanders possess a powerful means of influencing the

69

Page 84: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

97 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

course of combat. The efficiency with which artillery fires aremaneuvered is dependent upon adequate control, close liaisonwith supported troops, and efficient communication andobservation. Deficient observation causes a great increase inconsumption of ammunition. Poor signal communicationprevents concentration of fire both in time and place.

(4) The power of artillery is limited by its inability to actotherwise than by fire action; by its vulnerability when inmovement; and by its comparative vulnerability, even whenin position, to attack by fire at medium or short ranges, espe-cially from the flanks or rear. These limitations preventthe employment of the artillery as an independent, self-sustaining arm.

b. Tactical characteristics of various types.-(l) Lightartillery.-By reason of its range, mobility on the battlefield,and high rate of fire, light artillery is able to render contin-uous direct support to Infantry and Cavalry. In general, themethods of employment of truck-drawn and horse-drawnartillery are similar.

(a) Horse-draum.-Horse-drawn light artillery has greatmobility, across country, particularly on the battlefield, butis handicapped when long rapid road marches are required.

(b) Horse.-The mobility of horse artillery is greater thanthat of horse-drawn artillery and enables it to march andmaneuver with Cavalry.

(c) Pack.-Pack artillery has reasonably rapid, quiet, andreliable mobility over ground difficult or impossible of ma-neuver by other types of artillery. It is especially suitablefor operations in mountains and jungles and may be em-ployed advantageously in landing operations and as an ac-companying weapon, its materiel being readily moved by hand.It is incapable of moving at increased gaits.

(d) Truck-drawn.-The mobility of truck-drawn light ar-tillery across country approximates that of horse-drawnartillery. Where necessary, it .can accompany foot troops forprolonged periods, It has great advantage when long rapidmoves are required.

(2) Medium artillery-The mobility of truck-drawn me-dium artillery on good roads compares favorably with thatof truck-drawn light artillery under similar conditions; on

70

Page 85: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 97-98

poor roads and across country, that of the light artillery isappreciably greater. Tactically, medium artillery may beused advantageously for counterbattery, for destruction fire,for interdiction, and to give depth and increased destructiveeffect to the supporting fires of light artillery.

(3) Heavy artillery.-(a) Heavy artillery has the distinctivecharacteristics of long range, a slow rate of fire, and fire ofgreat destructive power. When compared with the light andmedium types, it lacks mobility and requires considerabletime for emplacement and displacement.

(b) Tactically, heavy artillery may be employed advan-tageously for interdiction fire on important points deepwithin the enemy lines, for neutralization or destruction ofenemy batteries and installations, and as necessary for re-inforcing the fires of corps or division artillery.

U 98. SUPPORTING ARTILLERY.-Supporting artillery may be ingeneral support or in direct support. General-support ar-tillery supports the entire unit; the power of concentratingits fire is at a maximum. Direct-support artillery has theprimary mission of supporting a designated subdivision ofthe unit and a secondary mission of acting in general sup-port; fire may be concentrated with reasonable facility. Theassignment of direct-support missions to artillery units per-mits direct cooperation with the supported units and enablesit to act with greater promptness in meeting the require-ments of the rapidly changing situation on the front of thesupported units. Such assignment does not, however, implysubordination of the artillery units to the commander ofthe unit supported. In the division, light artillery is normallyemployed in direct support, each artillery battalion normallyforming a combat team with an infantry regiment. Mediumartillery normally is in general support; all or a part maybe designated to reinforce the fires of the light artillery. Inthe corps, the corps artillery may be in general support ofthe corps as a whole; or part of it may be in general supportand part in direct support of one or more divisions; or, inappropriate situations, all may be in direct support ofdivisions.

71

Page 86: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

99-100 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 99. ATTACHED ARTILLERY.-When circumstances are suchthat the superior commander cannot efficiently direct thefire of the supporting artillery, it should be attached to thesupported unit. Artillery temporarily attached to anothercommand to serve under orders of the commander of theunit to which attached is designated "attached artillery."The term includes artillery units attached to subordinateinfantry or cavalry commands for combat, artillery unitsattached to security detachments, and artillery attached bya higher to a lower echelon.

a. Army.-Relatively few of the artillery units allottedto the army from the GHQ reserve will be retained by thearmy. The units retained will usually be of a type capableof covering the front of more than one corps; however, thearmy may retain for special missions certain units notcapable of long-range fire; ultimate employment of the latterunits usually will be under direction of the corps or divisions.

b. Corps.-The corps retains under its own control suchunits of attached artillery as are necessary for carryingout corps fire missions. Normally, light artillery units al-lotted to the corps are attached to divisions. Certain lightartillery units may be retained by the corps for specialmissions; however, their ultimate employment will normallybe under the direction of the divisions.

c. Division.-The effect of attaching units of division ar-tillery to infantry units of the division is to render theartillery less effective in delivering concentrated fire whenand where needed; as a result, the division commander isless able to influence the progress of the action as a whole.Consequently, he retains it normally under his own controlexercised through the commander of the division artillery.When combat breaks into disconnected local engagementsor in a situation where the division cannot be employed asa whole in coordinated action, the division commandermay attach to infantry units a part of or all the divisionartillery.

* 100. ACCOMPANYING ARTILLERY.-In some cases' it may beforeseen that liaison and communication between the as-sault infantry and the supporting artillery will be unde-

72

Page 87: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE . 100-101

pendable as a result of the breaking up of the engagementinto a series of local combats. Under such conditions, andwhen the division commander can afford to sacrifice thepower of concentration inherent in his artillery in orderto take advantage of the more direct and immediate com-munication, single batteries, platoons, or pieces may be at-tached to assault infantry regiments or battalions for theirclose support. Such artillery, known as accompanying ar-tillery, follows the assault infantry units closely, attackingrapidly at short ranges such targets as the Infantry cannotovercome with its own fire power. The use of accompany-ing artillery is rarely justified if taken from the direct-supportartillery.

* 101. DETACHED PIECES.-a. Roving suns.-Roving gunsare pieces of artillery withdrawn from their regular posi-tions and posted in temporary positions for the executionof specific missions upon the conclusion of which they re-join their batteries. They may be employed to deceive theenemy as to the strength of the artillery or true positionsof the batteries, or to fire particular missions which can-not be executed from the regular positions, especially harass-ing and interdiction fires.

b. Antitank guns.-Antitank guns, when furnished by thedivision Field Artillery, are usually light artillery pieces de-tached from their organic command and placed in positionswith the exclusive mission of firing upon enemy tanks. Inorder to conserve the power of the direct-support artillery for

'its primary mission, the number of guns detached for defenseagainst tanks should be held to the minimum demanded bythe situation. The use of antitank guns is normally limited todefensive actions and to terrain which favors a tank attack.Antitank guns should be'posted so as to cover the most prob-able lanes of tank approach, particularly terrain defiladedfrom the fire of supporting artillery. Their employmentshould be coordinated with other means of antitank defense.Echelonment of the antitank guns is desirable. They shouldbe in concealed or camouflaged direct-laying positions fromwhich they can be withdrawn quickly after firing.

73

Page 88: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

102 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 102. ARTILLERY RESERVES.--. The true reserve of the ar-tillery is its ability to concentrate and intensify its fire. Thischaracteristic is wholly dependent upon adequate ammunitionsupply.

b. When the combat situation remains obscure, a portionof the artillery may be held in readiness for movement toany point where developments in the situation require itsemployment. The mobility of truck-drawn artillery rendersthis type especially adapted to such use. Furthermore, al-though the mass of the artillery must be in a position toparticipate in the action as soon as the battle front has beendefinitely established, some units may be directed to remainsilent pending the development of certain contingenciesduring the battle.

74

Page 89: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 2

GENERAL COMBAT DUTIES OF ARTILLERY OFFICERS,ARTILLERY COMMANDERS, AND ARTILLERY STAFFS

ParagraphsSECTION I. General __----------_____-------------____ -__ 103-104

II. Artillery officers -______________---______---__ 105-109III. Corps artillery brigade commanders; regimental,

battalion, and battery commanders---------- 110-113IV. Field artillery staffs ______-------------------- 114-123

SECTION I

GENERAL

* 103. STAFF FUNCTIONS.-The subject of staff functions cov-ered in FM 101-5 applies in general to the duties of artillerystaffs.

* 104. CHAIN OF COMMAND.-There is no direct chain of ar-tillery command extending from armies to corps or fromcorps to divisions. Instructions originating with an army(corps) artillery officer (par. 105a) for the corps (division)artillery will be directed in the name of the army (corps)commander to the corps (division) commander, who will beresponsible for issuing appropriate orders to his artilleryofficer.

SECTION II

ARTILLERY OFFICERS

* 105. GENERAL.--a. The term "artillery officer" is used todesignate the senior officer in the field artillery section ofGHQ, army, corps, and division.

b. The artillery officer, GHQ, exercises no tactical com-mand. His special duties as a staff officer of the forcecommander are shown in paragraph 106. The role of theartillery officer, army, corps, or division, is dual. He com-mands all the artillery, both organic and attached, which hasnot been attached tb subordinate units; he is a member of

75

Page 90: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

105-107 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

the special staff of his commander, in which capacity he isassistant and advisor regarding all artillery matters.

1 106. ARTILLERY OFFICER, GHQ.-His duties are to-a. Determine the amounts and types of artillery and ar-

tillery munitions needed for the command as a whole.b. Weigh the relative needs and demands of the various

armies or groups of armies for artillery and to recommendthe allotment or withdrawal of units of the GHQ reserveartillery in accordance with such needs, also recommend thetransfer of artillery from one command to another or to theGHQ reserve.

c. Supervise such artillery schools as are under control ofthe commander of the field forces.

d. Recommend assignment of artillery personnel and deter-mine number of replacements to be provided for the artillery.

e. Supervise the training of artillery personnel.

* 107. ARMY ARTILLERY OFFICER.-Control of the artillerywith the corps by the army artillery officer, exercised throughthe normal chain of command, consists of assignment ofonly such general missions and zones to be covered by fireas are required for coordination of all the artillery with thearmy. His duties are to-

a. Recommend and prepare plans for employment of theartillery with the army, covering particularly-

(1) Amount of GHQ reserve artillery or other reinforcingunits needed; composition of the army artillery; and allot-ments to corps of such artillery as is not retained as armyartillery.

(2) Positions, observation facilities, and locations of rearestablishments to be reserved for the army artillery.

(3) Assignment of missions and zones of action to armyartillery and general instructions to corps governing theemployment of artillery with the corps.

(4) Coordination of missions and liaison between armyartillery and artillery with the corps and with adjacent armies.

(5) Air observation for army artillery.(6) Coordination of army artillery missions with Air Corps

attack and bombardment missions.b. Prepare the artillery annex to army field orders.

76

Page 91: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE ' 107-108

c. Regulate combat of the artillery with the army in accord-ance with instructions of the army commander.

d. Determine the needs of the army in artillery ammunitionand allot artillery ammunition to the army artillery and tocorps.

e. Coordinate artillery observation within the army.f. Make recommendations regarding artillery personnel,

mat6riel, methods, and training.

U 108. CORPS ARTILLERY OFFICER.-Control of division artilleryby the corps artillery officer, exercised through the normalchain of command, consists mainly of the assignment of zonesand missions necessary to coordinate the fire of the artillerywith the corps. His duties are to-

a. Recommend and prepare plans for employment of theartillery with the corps, covering particularly-

(1) Allotment of reinforcing artillery to divisions.(2) Temporary control to be exercised over division artil-

lery during certain preparatory phases of combat and inreinforcing the counterbattery fire of the corps artillery.

(3) Positions and observation facilities to be reserved forthe corps artillery.

(4) Assignment of missions and zones of action to corpsand division artillery.

(5) Coordination between units of artillery with the corps.(6) Control of counterbattery within the corps.(7) Air observation for corps artillery.(8) Displacement of artillery with the corps.b. Prepare the artillery annex to corps field orders.c. Regulate combat of the artillery with the corps according

to instructions of the corps commander.d. Organize corps artillery for combat so as to prescribe for

efficient execution of counterbattery and other special mis-sions.

e. Arrange with the army artillery and with the artilleryof adjacent corps for mutual reinforcement and coordinationof fires.

f. Coordinate the fire of the artillery with the corps withcombat aviation and with tanks assigned missions in the corpszone of action.

238273 °--40-6 77

Page 92: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

108-110 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

g. Allocate artillery ammunition to the divisions and tothe corps artillery and to supervise its distribution.

h. Submit recommendations regarding artillery personnel,mat6riel, and methods.

1 109. DIVISION ARTILLERY OFFICER.-The principal duties ofthe division artillery officer are as follows:

a. Commander of artillery with the division.b. Tactical and technical advisor to the division commander

on artillery matters.c. Responsibility for training of the organic division

artillery.d. Preparation of plans for the allotment and use of

artillery.e. Supervision of observation, signal communication, and

liaison within the division artillery.f. Coordination of the survey system within the division

artillery.g. Furnishing meteorological data to the division artillery.h. Allocation of artillery ammunition and general super-

vision of its distribution.i. Coordination of fires of the division artillery.j. Preparation of plans for employment of air observation

for the division artillery and for cooperation of the divisionartillery with tanks and with Air Corps units assigned attackor bombardment missions within the division area.

k. Preparation of the artillery subparagraph of the divisionorder and of the artillery annex (when required).

1. Collection and dissemination of artillery informationthrough artillery intelligence agencies.

SECTION III

CORPS ARTILLERY BRIGADE COMMANDERS; REGI-MENTAL, BATTALION, AND BATTERY COMMANDERS

* 110. CORPS ARTILLERY BRIGADE COMMANDER.-The corps ar-tillery brigade commander exercises immediate command ofthe corps artillery brigade as a subordinate of the corps ar-tillery officer. During combat, he may be placed in commandof all the reinforcing artillery retained under corps control,or where considerable amounts of reinforcing artillery are

78

Page 93: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 110-112

involved, he may be placed in command of one of the largegroupments into which the corps artillery may be divided.

* 111. REGIMENTAL COMMANDER.--. General.-When a regi-mental commander is the senior artillery officer with a com-bined arms force, his functions are analogous to those of thedivision artillery officer. His usual functions are both tacticaland administrative.

b. Tactical duties.-The principal tactical duties of theregimental commander are to-

(1) Supervise training to keep his regiment prepared for,efficient operation in peace and war.

(2) As an informational agency, assist the battalion com-manders by securing and disseminating to them informationof the enemy and of the plans and actions of supported andassociated troops.

(3) Formulate plans for the tactical employment of theregiment and assign definite missions by orders to his subor-dinates in conformity with these plans.

(4) Supervise the execution of missions assigned to sub-ordinates.

(5) Plan ahead in order to be prepared to bring the firepower of the regiment to the assistance of supported unitsin all changes of the situation.

(6) Allocate to battalions ammunition placed at the dis-posal of the regiment and supervise ammunition distribution.

a 112. BATTALION COMMANDER.-Tactically, the disposition andemployment of artillery resolves itself eventually into themovement, locations, missions, and ammunition supply ofbattalions. Fire direction culminates in the battalion. Thebattalion commander's principal tactical duties are to-

a. Keep constantly informed of the enemy situation, of theplans of higher commanders, and of the disposition, missions,and plans of supported troops.

b: In accordance with plans of higher commanders andsupported troops, prepare plans for the movement, emplace-ment, tactical employment, and ammunition supply of hisbattalion, the details of which include-

(1) Reconnaissance of position for the battalion, routesthereto, and assignment of positions to subordinate units.

79

Page 94: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

112-114 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(2) Directions regarding organization of the position, in-cluding establishment of suitable command, liaison, observa-tion, and signal communication. Insofar as is compatiblewith a proper exercise of his functions of command, a bat-talion commander charged with the duty of direct supportestablishes his own command post in close proximity to thatof the commander of the supported unit and maintains per-sonal liaison with him, He maintains contact with assaultunit commanders by means of his liaison officers.

(3) Missions to subordinate units which may be assigned* to batteries by designating normal and contingent zones in-

volving fire on targets of opportunity within these zones, byassigning specific fire missions to each battery, or by a com-bination of both methods.

(4) Fire direction. The functions of the battalion com-mander regarding fire direction are treated in FM 6-40.

(5) Ammunition supply of the battalion which requirescareful supervision of ammunition expenditures. When bat-teries are assigned zones of fire, a limitation on ammunitionexpenditures is necessary; when assigned specific fire mis-sions, the number of rounds for each is prescribed.

I 113. BATTERY COMMANDER.-The battery commander com-mands the battery and supervises all its activities; recon-noiters and selects positions; determines objectives and thecharacter of fire in accordance with instructions of the bat-talion commander; prepares and conducts fire; and providesfor replacement of personnel, ammunition, and equipment.For training and administration of the battery, the batterycommander may divide the battery into departments asdescribed in FM 6-5.

SECTION IV

FIELD ARTILLERY STAFFS

* 114. GENERAL.-a. Battalions and higher units.-Com-manders of battalions iand high~er units offartilIery, includingthe respective artillery officers, have staffs which in general aresimilarly organized but vary in the number of their personneland in the number, magnitude, and complexity of their func-tions. Those staff officers assigned functions corresponding

80

Page 95: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 114-115

to the chief of staff, G-1, G-2, G-3, and G-4 sections of thegeneral staff are referred to as the executive,' S-1, S-2, S-3,and S-4. While an organization for each staff and the dutiesof each staff officer are prescribed, the artillery commandervaries the organization and functions of his staff to meetbest the demands of each particular situation. (See FM101-5.)

b. Battery.-The battery has no staff sections correspond-ing to higher headquarters. The reconnaissance officer,executive, and assistant executive perform such staff dutiescorresponding to the several staff sections as are required.

(1) The reconnaissance officer's duties in combat includeassistance of the battery commander in reconnaissance,preparation of fire, and observation; survey operations; su-pervision of establishment of the observation post, commu-nication, and other functions of the battery detail; intelli-gence; and preparation of maps and sketches.

(2) The duties of the executive and assistant executive aretreated in FM 6-40.

c. Forms.-For forms used by various staff sections, seeFM 6-130.

* 115. THE EXECUTIVE.-The executive is the principal assist-ant and adviser of the commander. He transmits the willof the commander to those who execute it and is the principalcoordinating agency which insures efficient functioning ofthe staff and of all troops of the command. He performs thefollowing specific duties:

a. Formulates and announces policies for general operationof the staff.

b. Directs and coordinates the work of the four staff sec-tions in all their relations with the special staff, with thetroops, and with each other.

c. Keeps the commander informed of the enemy situationand of the situation of the command as to location, strength,morale, training, equipment, supply, and general effective-ness.

d. Represents the commander during his temporary ab-sence or when authorized to do so. Normally, the executiverefers all matters of importance to the commander for deci-

81

Page 96: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

115-116 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

sion. However, in the absence of the commander, the execu-tive does not hesitate to assume the responsibility for makinga decision on any pressing matter regardless of its im-portance, acting always in accordance with his knowledgeof the commander's plans.

e. Obtains basic decisions from the commander and takesthe following action:

(1) Makes necessary decisions supplementary thereto andgives necessary instructions to the staff in furtherance of thebasic decisions of the commander.

(2) Allots detailed work of preparing plans and orders,obtains drafts of plans and orders from the four staff sec-tions, and submits to the commander a completed plandeveloped from the section plans.

f. Reviews and coordinates all instructions that are to bepublished to the command and assures himself that theyare strictly in accord with policies and plans of the com-mander.

g. By personal observation and through the four staff sec-tions, sees that orders and instructions of the commanderare executed both in spirit and in letter.

h. Makes a continuous study of the situation with a viewto being prepared for further contingencies.

i. Establishes the command post in the location designatedby the commander; insures that the various elements thereofare disposed to facilitate operation and are properly pro-tected and concealed. The executive is assisted in this dutyby the communication officer.

j. Supervises the keeping of the unit journal.k. Assembles data for and prepares the unit report; after

its approval by the commander, forwards a copy to the nexthigher headquarters.

[ 116. S-1 (PERSONNEL) SECTION.--. General.-(1) The S-1section of a field artillery staff consists of a chief of section(the adjutant) and such enlisted assistants as are providedin Tables of Organization. It is charged with the handlingof all matters relating to personnel as individuals. No S-1section is provided in the staff of the corps artillery officer,nor in the staff of the division artillery officer when the divi-

82

Page 97: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 116

sion artillery is not organized as a brigade. Such S-1 dutiesas may be required of these staffs are handled by an aide.

(2) Duties.-The more important duties of S-1 are-(a) Handling of all official correspondence (except that

pertaining to combat orders and instructions) in accordancewith regulations and approved policies. In cases for whichno policy has been established, S-1 initiates action to securea policy.

(b) Authentication and distribution of all orders and in-structions except those pertaining to combat operations.

(c) Maintenance of the headquarters office of record.(d) Operation of the postal service.(e) Operation, in accordance with approved policies, of

activities at the headquarters pertaining to-1. Classification of all individuals of the command;

their assignment, promotion, transfer, retirement,and discharge.

2. Procurement and replacement of personnel in ac-cordance with priorities formulated by the plansand training section.

3. Decorations, citations, honors, and awards.4. Leaves of absence and furloughs.5. Education, recreation, and welfare, exclusive of

religious matters.(f) Custody of records of all personnel belonging to the

command which are not kept in some subordinate unit.(g) Supplying of blank forms, publications, and instruc-

tional matter furnished by the Adjutant General's Depart-ment.

(h) Operation of a general follow-up system for theheadquarters as regards administrative matters, includingrecommendations as to similar arrangements in headquartersof subordinate units.

(i) Supervision of operation of medical personnel insanitation.

(i) Supervision of headquarters arrangements includingthe officers' mess.

(k) Furnishing information relative to, shelter necessaryfor the command and assigning shelter.

83

Page 98: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

1:16-117 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(I) When directed, acting as agent of the division financeofficer in the payment of troops.

(m) Command of the rear echelon.(n) Keeping in close touch with the tactical situation so

that.he may replace or temporarily perform the duties ofany other staff officer.

(o) When required, furnishing the executive with per-tinent data for inclusion in the unit report.

b. Brigade S-1.-The duties of the brigade S-1 are verylimited since in practically all matters the regimental S-1sections deal directly with division (corps, army) headquar-ters. The duties of S-1 relate principally to the personneland administrative matters pertaining to the artillery head-quarters and the headquarters battery or detachment andto matters relating to quartering.

c. Regimental S-1.-Since the regiment is an adminis-trative unit, the regimental S-1 is concerned with all theduties listed in a(2) above. In addition, the regimentalS-1 becomes the custodian of all funds of subordinate com-bat units when the latter enter the combat zone and com-mands the band when one is assigned by Tables ofOrganization.

d. Battalion S-1-(1) The battalion, when present withits regiment, is not an administrative unit; the regimentalS-1 section handles practically all personnel matters di-:rectly with the battery commanders. In this case, theduties of the battalion S-1 are similar to those of thebrigade S-1.

(2) When the battalion is absent from the regiment, thebattalion 7-1 assumes 'the personnel and administrativeduties normally performed by the regimental S-1.

Ui117. S-2 (INTELLIGENCE) SECTION.-a. General.-(1) Artil-lery units seek continuously for information of the enemy by:all available means. Information is gathered and evaluatedby S-2 sections and disseminated, not only in the command,of which the section is a part, but to subordinate, higher, andadjacent commands as well. It is of special importance thatinformation be transmitted promptly through artillery chan-nels to the intelligence section of the corps artillery officer.In principle, each individual of an artillery unit, whether con-

84

Page 99: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 117

nected with the S-2 section or not, is an intelligence agent andshould forward without delay all enemy information securedby him, even though it may seem unimportant from his pointof view. Many items of apparent minor importance, whenfitted together, build up a useful picture of enemy activitiesand intentions.

(a) Complete information is sought regarding location, dis-position, strength by caliber, composition, and general effi-ciency of enemy artillery; location of appropriate artillerytargets; enemy dispositions including location of strong pointsand centers of resistance; movement of enemy artillery andlocation of enemy artillery in reserve; antitank and rovingguns; observation posts and command posts; airplane landingfields and balloon beds; location of ammunition dumps anddistributing points; and routes used by the enemy. A recordis kept of the date and time enemy batteries fire, types andcalibers, character of emplacements if known, targets fired at,number of rounds fired, types of ammunition and fuzes used,results obtained and when possible the designation and exactlocation of each unit firing.

(b) The sources available to the artillery are higher head-quarters, including the intelligence sections of army, corps,division, brigade, and regiment; adjacent units; supportedunits, including infantry regiments and battalions; associatedunits, including air observation units, sound-and-flash units,engineer topographic units, radio-intercept and goniometricunits, and meteorological sections; subordinate units, includ-ing their observation posts and liaison officers; and examina-tion of captured materiel or of fragments of hostileprojectiles.

(2) Duties.-The principal duties of S-2 may be summar-ized as follows:

(a) To initiate a systematic and coordinated search forrequired information by all available collecting agencies.

(b) To collate, evaluate, and interpret information from allpossible sources.

(c) To reduce intelligence to a systematic form and dis-tribute it to all concerned in time to be of value to therecipients. Prompt distribution of items affecting the direc-tion or conduct of artillery fire is particularly important.

85

Page 100: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

117 FIELD'ARTILLERY FIELD M.NUAL

(d) To work in close coordination with the S-3 section ofthe staff and to assist in the preparation of combat orders.S-2 usually writes the paragraph of the field order coveringinformation of the enemy, and when an operation map isissued as an annex to the field order, places the enemy situa-tion on the operation map.

(e) To coordinate, through the normal chain of command,the work of intelligence personnel within the unit.

(f) To keep in close touch with intelligence sections ofhigher, lower, adjacent, and supported units for the purposeof interchange of information:

(g) To obtain and distribute maps and map substitutes.(h) To keep the S-2 work sheet, S-2 situation map, and

such other records pertaining to S-2 duties as the situationmay require.

(i) To furnish the executive with pertinent data for inclu-sion in the unit report.

b. S-2, staff of corps artillery offlcer.-(1) Functions.-The S-2 section of the staff of the corps artillery officer is theprincipal link in the artillery intelligence activities. Here,all information of interest to the artillery (a(l) above) iscentralized, transformed into intelligence, and disseminatedto the artillery with the corps and to higher and adjacentunits. One of the principal functions of this section is thelocation of enemy batteries, maintenance of a record andstudy of their activities, and cooperation with the S-3 sectionin effecting counterbattery. Through the normal chain ofcommand, the S-2 section coordinates the work of the intelli-gence personnel of subordinate units and coordinates andutilizes the observation facilities available to the artilleryincluding ground, air, and sound-and-flash. It maintains astudy of the enemy artillery and prepares and issues thisinformation every 24 hours or at longer intervals by means ofan S-2 (intelligence) bulletin which is distributed to thearmy artillery officer, to the artillery with the corps to includebattalions, to each division with the corps, and to adjacentcorps. It maintains close contact with the corps 0-2 andassists in the preparation of the corps Intelligence Annex, theG-2 Report, and enemy situation maps.

86

Page 101: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 117

(2) Orga;tization.-The S-2 section provided in Tables ofOrganization is organized at the discretion of the senior. Toinsure effective performance of its functions careful planningof individual duties is essential. A workable organizationwith individual duties is outlined as follows:

(a) Chief of section.1. To keep in close touch, by personal visits, with the

corps 0-2 and with the S-2's of subordinate andadjacent artillery units; to determine the natureof any specific information which is required andplan with the corps G-2 for use of intelligenceagencies not under control of the corps artilleryofficer.

2. To keep constantly informed of the enemy artillerysituation and acquaint the corps artillery officerand other members of the staff with importantinformation or changes.

3. To prepare special studies of the enemy artillerysituation.

4. To coordinate, through the normal chain of com-mand, the work of intelligence personnel of sub-ordinate units to insure the constant flow ofinformation to the corps S-2 section.

5. To assist the 8-3 section in the preparation ofcombat orders.

6. To supervise the work of the entire S-2 section.(b) Current activities subsection.

1. To receive incoming information and determinewhether it requires immediate action or is foruse of the research subsection.

2. To transmit information requiring immediate actionto the proper destination for quick exploitation.

3. To transmit appropriate information to the re-search subsection.

4. To assist in the routine work of the research sub-section when time permits.

(c) Research subsection.1. To study, evaluate, and interpret information of the

enemy's artillery.

87

Page 102: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

117 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

2. To keep the current activities subsection and thecounterbattery office of the S-3 section informedof important results of its research.

3. To keep the enemy battery file wherein is recordedall available information of the enemy artillery.

4. To keep the S-2 work sheet and post the S-2 sit-uation map.

5. To prepare the S-2 bulletin by means of which en-emy information is disseminated daily to all theartillery with the corps.

6. To supervise the keeping of the necessary S-2 files.c. Bridge S-2, division artillery.-(1) The brigade S-2 co-

ordinates the establishment of special artillery intelligenceobservation posts when conditions warrant their use.

(2) When the division is acting alone, S-2 is called uponto perform the duties usually pertaining to the S-2 on thestaff of the corps artillery officer, in addition to those appli-cable when the division is part of a corps. In such cases,the S-2 bulletin form should be used for dissemination ofintelligence of importance to the artillery.

(3) When the division artillery is not organized as a bri-gade, Tables of Organization do not provide an S-2 sectionin the division artillery officer's staff; in such case, one ofthe aides functions as S-2.

d. Regimental S-2.-(1) The primary function of the regi-mental S-2 is to locate appropriate artillery targets withinthe zone of action of the regiment and to transmit this in-formation without delay to the regimental S-3 section orthe brigade S-2 section, depending upon the nature of thetarget. As a result of the restricted viewpoint of the regi-mental S-2, his mission is primarily collecting and distribut-ing information and secondarily, interpretation. Interpreta-tion can be done more effectively at the higher headquarters.When the artillery regiment is acting alone, for examplewhen attached to an independent force of Infantry or Cav-alry, the regimental S-2 performs in addition to his normalfunctions such of the duties prescribed for the brigade S-2section as are appropriate to the situation.

(2) The regimental S-2 has few sources of informationunder his direct control. He must depend mostly on the S-2

88

Page 103: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 117-118

sections of lower, supported, adjacent, and higher units forinformation.

e. Battalion S-2.-(1) With his restricted point of view,the function of the battalion S-2 becomes primarily and al-most entirely the collection and distribution of information.Interpretation, except in a general way, is impracticable. Hisprimary mission is to obtain and pass on to S-3 informationof targets appropriate for the immediate action of the bat-talion and transmit promptly to the regimental S-2 sectionall information on targets not suitable for battalion firemissions.

(2) The principal sources of enemy information availableto, the battalion S-2 are liaison officers, observation posts,reconnaissance personnel, and supported troops.

(3) In addition to his purely intelligence functions, S-2 isusually required to-

(a) Assist the battalion commander in reconnaissance.(b) Recommend the location of the observation posts

within the battalion.(c) Assist the officer in charge of fire direction.

* 118. S-3 (PLANS AND TRAINING) SECTION.-a. General.-(1)The S-3 section of a field artillery staff consists of a chiefof section and such commissioned and enlisted assistants asare provided in Tables of Organization. The S-3 section ischarged in general with those functions of the staff whichrelate to organization, training, and operations. It is theduty of this section to keep the commander informed on allmatters pertaining to the training, combat efficiency, anddisposition of the units of the command. The S-3 sectionassists the commander and the executive in formulating plans,and is responsible for the preparation and issue of combatorders. From the nature of its duties, it must maintain theclosest cooperation and collaboration with the staff andwith subordinate commanders.

(2) Duties.-S-3 performs the following specific duties:(a) Prepares plans for, secures approval thereof, and

supervises-1. Mobilization of the unit.2. Organization and equipment of the unit.

89

Page 104: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

118 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

3. Training, including preparation of training pro-grams and orders, organization and conduct ofschools, and rendition of training reports andmaintenance of records of training.

4. Assignment and attachment of units.5. Movement of troops.6. Tactical disposition of troops.

(b) Keeps informed of, studies, and keeps the commanderinformed of-

1. Location, effective strength, and morale of subordi-nate units.

2. Needs for replacements.3. State of equipment and supplies.4. Enemy situation.5. Adaptability of terrain to combat operations.6. Location and plans of supported unit.7. Instructions and orders received from higher units.

(c) Prepares field orders and, when approved, is respon-sible for their timely delivery to the troops.

(d) Recommends priorities for the assignment of replace-ment and equipment.

(e) Makes a continuous study of the situation in orderto be prepared for contingencies that may arise.

(I) Executes such reconnaissance as the commander maydirect.

(g) Assists the commander in fire direction by assigningtargets to subordinate units.

(h) Keeps the diary of the unit.(i) Keeps the S-3 work sheet, S-3 situation map, and

such other records pertaining to S-3 duties as the situationmay require.

(j) Furnishes the executive with pertinent data for in-clusion in the unit report.

(3) The following S-3 duties in the preparation and issueof combat orders are particularly important:

(a) When the commander issues a field order in frag-mentary form, S-3 is responsible, when time and facilitiespermit, that the fragmentary orders are confirmed as soonas practicable by the issuance of the order in complete

90

Page 105: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 118

form when such procedure will be of some use to subor-dinates in planning their operations.

(b) When the commander issues an oral field order, S-3takes notes of the order and, when time and facilities per-mit, converts them into a written field order to be issuedto the troops as soon as practicable when such procedurewill be of some use to subordinates in planning theiroperations.

(c) When the commander issues a dictated order, S-3takes down the order verbatim; his copy then becomes theofficial record of the provisions of the order.

(d) When the commander issues a complete written fieldorder, S-3 is responsible for the actual preparation of theorder. Usually those parts of the order that pertain toother staff sections are drafted in such sections and trans-mitted to S-3 for incorporation in the order. After thecompleted order is signed by the commander or executive,its distribution is the responsibility of S-3.

(e) The preparation of operation maps is the responsibilityof S-3.

b. S-3, staff of corps artillery officer.-(1) S-3 is primarilyconcerned with preparing detailed plans for the tacticalorganization and employment of the artillery with the corps,to include the movement and disposition of reinforcing ar-tillery, and counterbattery.

(2) Since the mission of counterbattery (par. 134) is theprincipal function of the corps artillery, the S-3 sectionmust be highly organized to direct it efficiently; an officerspecially designated as counterbattery officer, whose timewill be devoted solely to this function, often will be required.

c. Brigade S-3.-(1) The duties of the brigade S-3 areas outlined in a(2) above; in addition, he is responsible for thecoordination of the fires of the regiments of the brigade.

(2) Although counterbattery is primarily a function ofthe corps artillery, it may be necessary in some situationsto operate a counterbattery system within the division ar-tillery. If so, responsibility for the organization andoperation of the system falls to the brigade S-3.

91

Page 106: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

118-119 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(3) When the division artillery is not organized as abrigade, the S-3 on the staff of the division artillery officerperforms the duties ordinarily performed by a brigade S-3.

d. Regimental S-3.-The duties of the regimental S-3are as outlined in a(2) above; in addition, he is responsiblefor coordination of the fires of the battalions.

e. Battalion S-3.-The battalion S-3 is in charge of thefire direction center. He is responsible, under direction cfthe battalion commander, for the assignment of targets tobatteries and for the transmittal of orders for firing. Hekeeps in part II of his work sheet or on the fire mission forma record of target assignments and the effect of the fire, andis careful to assign missions to batteries that are availableand best suited to the accomplishment of such missions. Ifall the batteries are firing, S-3 determines, under policies an-nounced by the battalion commander, which battery, if any,must change to the new objective.

* 119. S-4 (SUPPLY) SECTION.-a. General.-(1) The S-4section of a field artillery staff consists of a chief of sectionand such commissioned and enlisted assistants as are pro-vided in Tables of Organization. This section is charged ingeneral with all supply arrangements. It keeps in constanttouch with the S-3 section so as to keep informed of changesin the tactical situation which will necessitate changing thesupply arrangements. It is responsible for the assurance ofsuch supply arrangements as will permit the utmost freedomof action to the command.

(2) Duties.-S-4 performs the following specific duties:(a) Prepares and submits requisitions for supplies (except

class I supply, which is automatic). In an emergency, suchrequisition may be merely an informal request made bytelephone.

(b) Prepares plans for the drawing and issue of supplies.(c) Draws and issues supplies (other than ammunition,

which is drawn and issued by the commanders of the am-munition trains).

(d) Supervises the operating agencies concerned with am-munition supply to include the care, protection, and conceal-ment of ammunition.

92

Page 107: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 119

(e) Recommends such administrative and supply details asneed to go in field orders.

(I) Plans and supervises construction work.(g) Is responsible for salvage operations.(h) Keeps the S-4 work sheet.(i) Prepares the ammunition report.() Furnishes the executive with pertinent data for inclu-

sion in the unit report.b. S-4, staff of corps artillery officer.-The principal func-

tion of S-4 is to assist the corps artillery officer in all matterspertaining to the allocation and distribution of ammunitionto the artillery with the corps. In this capacity, the S-4section is concerned principally with estimates of ammunitionrequirements and with plans for allocation. This involves acomplete knowledge of the quantities and kinds of ammuni-tion with the troops and available to the corps at each am-munition supply point or corps establishment; suitability ofthe road net; transportation facilities of the several divisionsand corps; and feasibility of distributing the estimated re-quirements in the time available. The S-4 section concernsitself with matters other than munitions only to the extentthat such supply may affect the efficiency of the artillerywith the corps.

c. Brigade S-4.-(1) Since the brigade is not an adminis-trative unit, the brigade S-4 is concerned with supply, otherthan ammunition supply, only to the extent of insuring thatsupplies are adequate for anticipated operations. S-4's pri-mary concern has to do with the ammunition supply of theartillery regiments.

(2) In preparing plans for the procurement and issue ofammunition for the artillery, S-4 works in close collabora-tion with division G-4 (or S-4 of the staff of the Corps Artil-lery Officer, if a corps artillery brigade). In this connection,S-4 must-

(a) Obtain from G-4 the location of the ammunition supplypoint, the hour at which it will open, and the amount ofammunition available to the artillery.

(b) Reconnoiter and recommend to G-4 the locations ofartillery ammunition distributing points (when required),

238273°--40-7 93

Page 108: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

119 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

their stockage (if any), the hour at which they will open,and the units they will serve.

(c) Keep informed of the location, amount, and disposi-tion (whether dumped or on wheels) of the artillery ammuni-tion within the brigade, and pass on this information to theartillery commander and the staff.

(3) When the artillery is not organized as a brigade, theS-4 on the staff of the artillery commander performs theduties ordinarily performed by a brigade S-4.

d. Regimental S-4.-(1) Since the regiment is an ad-ministrative unit, the regimental S-4 is concerned with allthe duties listed in a(2) above.

(2) For all supplies and equipment, except ammunition,S4 is the operating agency; that is, he is responsible for theactual drawing of supplies from the supply services and thereissue of these supplies to batteries.

(3) As regards ammunition supply, S-4 is responsible forkeeping the regimental commander and staff informed ofthe ammunition situation within the regiment, and for theformulation and execution of an adequate plan for ammuni-tion supply. The actual resupply of battalions is a functionof battalion S-4's and ammunition train commanders.

e. Battalion S-4.-(1) When the battalion is operating withits regiment, the regimental S-4 procures and delivers tobatteries all supplies except ammunition. The battalion S-4is concerned with such supplies only to the extent of insuringtheir adequacy; his primary concern is with the ammunitionsupply.

(2) In preparing his ammunition supply plan, S-4 worksin close collaboration with regimental S-4 and the battalionammunition train commander. In this connection, S-4must-

(a) Secure from regiment the location of the point fromwhich the battalion ammunition train is to draw ammunition,the amount of credit available there for the battalion, andthe times during which ammunition may be drawn.

(b) Reconnoiter and recommend to the battalion com-mander the location for the battalion ammunition train and,when required, the battalion ammunition dumps.

94

Page 109: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 119-122

(c) Insure that the battalion has at all times sufficientammunition in correct proportion as to kind to meet theneeds of the situation, especially that all ammunition-carry-ing vehicles are fully loaded when the battalion moves. Thisnecessitates his keeping in close touch with the batteries andthe battalion staff as well as the ammunition train com-mander and regimental S-4.

(3) When a battalion is detached from its regiment, thebattalion S-4 assumes all the supply functions normally per-formed by the regimental S-4. In such case, the battalionS-4 is provided with assistance by the attachment to thebattalion of additional personnel and vehicles from the regi-mental supply and maintenance platoon. Personnel thus at-tached include the assistant regimental S-4 when authorizedin Tables of Organization.

* 120. COMMUNICATION OFFICER.-The communication officer,a member of the special staff of field artillery brigades, regi-ments, and battalions, functions in the dual capacity of staffofficer and commander of headquarters battery. His dutiesas communication officer are covered in part two.

* 121. RECONNAISSANCE OFFICER.-Each regiment and bat-talion of Field Artillery has a reconnaissance officer on itsspecial staff. The principal duties of the reconnaissanceofficer are to-

a. Assist the commander in reconnaissance (part one).b. Perform the necessary survey (FM 6-40).c. Supervise the preparation of the necessary dead space

and visibility charts (FM 6-40).d. When not otherwise engaged, assist S-3 or other staff

officer as directed by the executive.

* 122. LIAISON OFFICER (par. 143).-The duties of the liaisonofficer may be summarized as follows:

a. To train and command his liaison section.b. To represent his commander at the headquarters of the

unit to which he is sent.c. In action, after receipt of instructions from his com-

mander, the liaison officer arranges with the communicationofficer the necessary details of communication; confers withS-3 to ascertain the location of base points and check con-

95

Page 110: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

122-123 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

centrations, and to obtain overlays, if available, showingschedule fires. He then proceeds with his liaison section tojoin the unit to which he is sent. Upon arriving thereat, theliaison officer acts as artillery adviser to the supported-unitcommander, keeps him informed of the possibilities of ar-tillery support, and communicates to the artillery commanderthe desires of the supported troops for artillery fire. In ad-dition, the liaison officer keeps the artillery commanderadvised at all times of the location of the elements of thesupported troops and of the enemy situation, assists in ob-servation, and when necessary in the adjustment of fire. Hemakes frequent reports by such means of communication asare available, such as wire, radio, visual signaling, andmessengers.U 123. MOTOR OFFICER.-Each motorized regiment of FieldArtillery is provided with a motor officer by Tables of Organ-ization. In other units where appropriate, the unit com-mander designates a staff officer or other qualified officer toact as motor officer. His duties are covered in FM 25-10.

96

Page 111: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 3

FIRE IN COMBAT

U 124. CLASSIFICATION OF FIREs.-Tactically, artillery fire isclassified as to-

a. Effect sought.(1) Destruction.(2) Neutralization.b. Form.(1) Concentrations.(2) Barrages.c. Prearrangement.(1) Schedule fires.(2) Fires on targets of opportunity.d. Tactical purpose.(1) Supporting fire.(2) Artillery preparation.(3) Counterpreparation.(4) Counterbattery.(5) Interdiction fire.(6) Harassing fire.

* 125. DESTRUCTION FIRE.-The term "destruction" is appliedto fire delivered for the express purpose of destruction andwhen it is reasonable to expect that relatively complete de-struction can be attained. Fire for destruction requires amuch greater expenditure of ammunition and time than firefor neutralization. Against most targets, medium and heavyartillery are better suited than light artillery for destructionfire.

E 126. NEUTRALIZATION FIRE.-Neutralization fire is used forthe purpose of causing severe losses, hampering or interrupt-ing movement or action, and in general destroying the combatefficiency of enemy personnel. In the usual case, neutraliza-tion is only temporary and the target becomes active soonafter fire ceases. Neutralization fire is begun by a suddenshort burst of fire to secure the advantage and effect of sur-

97

Page 112: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

126-127 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

prise. This initial fire is delivered as rapidly as possible. Thedesired effect having been secured in this manner, neutraliza-tion is maintained by subsequent bursts of fire in lesseramounts at varying intervals. Unlike destruction fire, neu-tralization fire may be delivered with reasonable effectivenesswithout observation, although observation greatly increasesthe effectiveness and is sought when possible.

8 127. CONCENTRATIONS.-A concentration is a volume of fireplaced on an area within a limited time. The term is appli-cable regardless of the tactical purpose of the fire, the tacticalsituation (such as attack or defense), and the conditionsunder which the fire is delivered. Thus "concentration" isa general and inclusive term.

a. In the defensive.-(1) In the defensive, concentrationsare for the purpose of breaking up and defeating a hostileattack. In principle, the fire is delivered against the hostileassault units including local reserves. Effort is made tostrike the enemy, not merely to place a barrier in front ofhim. Whenever possible, observed fire should be employed;prior to the enemy attack, however, concentrations are pre-pared to be fired successively as the enemy attack progresses.Schedule fires (par. 129) are abandoned when the artillerymay be employed more advantageously against importanttargets that have developed during the action.

(2) Concentrations are prepared to prevent the enemyfrom occupying critical positions either immediately in frontof or within the friendly lines; also to cover critical areasbetween centers of resistance and to break up an enemyattack in the event that it should succeed in making progresswithin the friendly lines.

b. In the offensive.-(1) Direct-support artillery.-In theattack, concentrations by direct-support artillery are placedon selected enemy locations, so timed and in such volume asto furnish the maximum possible support to the attackingInfantry. These concentrations may be prearranged by theinfantry and artillery commanders or prepared and deliveredon targets of opportunity as called for by the supported in-fantry units. The employment of concentrations on theoffensive in support of advancing Infantry has an advantageover the use of rolling barrages in that, for a given amount

98

Page 113: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 127-128

of ammunition, it permits placing a denser fire on the im-portant points of the enemy positions while economizing onpoints of lesser importance.

(2) Other artillery.-Concentrations fired by other thandirect-support artillery normally consist of fires in rein-forcement of the direct-support artillery; neutralizationharassing, and counterbattery fires; and interdiction ofenemy installations deeper in enemy territory.

(3) Safety limit.-In order to avoid casualties from shellfragments, the Infantry should maintain a distance fromthe near edge of the concentration of 200 yards for lightartillery and 500 yards for medium or heavy artilery.

* 128. BARRAGES.-Barrages may be standing, rolling, or box;they are schedule fires (par. 129). The rate of fire prescribedwill depend upon the tactical situation and the status ofammunition supply.

a. Standing barrage.-A standing barrage is a stationaryline or lines of bursting projectiles placed immediately infront of an occupied line or position for the purpose of stop-ping an enemy advance. Such a barrage is appropriate inthe defense and, in an advance, to cover troops while haltedto reorganize on a captured objective. A barrage should beplaced from about 200 to 400 yards (at least eight probableerrors) in front of the line occupied by friendly troops. Ifthe barrage line is within eight probable errors of friendlytroops, some shots may fall in friendly lines. The locationof the barrage lines is determined by the battalion command-ers of the direct-support light artillery in consultation withthe supported units. Higher artillery commanders succes-sively coordinate the barrage scheme in order to avoid dupli-cation, provide the necessary emergency barrages in adjacentsectors, and otherwise insure that the scheme conforms tothe general plan. The standing barrage in defense is placedto fill in gaps or to reinforce the infantry close-in fires atcritical points. Each light battery may be assigned two ormore barrages on different parts of the front, one as its nor-mal barrage (200 yards for 75-mm and 300 yards for 105-mm)and others as emergency barrages (300 yards for 75-mm and450 yards for 105-mm). Standing barrages usually are firedby the light artillery.

99

Page 114: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

128 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(1) Normal.-The normal barrage of a battery is the stand-ing barrage which the battery fires for the local protectionof a supported command in the event of a hostile raid orattack. A battery is kept constantly laid on its normal bar-rage when not otherwise engaged, and fires the barrage onsignal or call from the supported unit. Normally, only thesensitive points between or in front of the centers of resist-ance are covered by normal barrages, the intervening spacesbeing covered by emergency barrages and the fire of infantryweapons.

(2) Emergency.-The emergency barrages of a battery arestanding barrages, any one of which may be fired as orderedinstead of its normal barrage. Emergency barrages are em-ployed in local attacks to cover gaps in the normal barrageline or to reinforce the normal barrage of another part ofthe line. Emergency barrages are fired on authority of thedivision artillery officer; this authority may be delegated tolocal artillery commanders.

b. Rolling barrage.-(1) A rolling barrage is artillery fireon successive lines, advancing according to a time scheduleimmediately ahead of the attacking troops. Normally, thebarrage fire put down by the light artillery is deepened by con-centrations fired by light and medium artillery placed onsensitive points in advance of the barrage line. To be effec-tive, a rolling barrage should have a depth of at least 600yards. A 75-mm battery, when firing in the first line of arolling barrage, normally covers a front of 100 yards.

(2) Batteries should be afforded an opportunity to registerbefore firing a rolling barrage; when registration is not prac-ticable, fire should be carefully prepared and the initial lineof the barrage should be 400 yards in front of the Infantryto be supported.

(3) The practicability of firing a rolling barrage is basedon considerations of the front to be covered, batteries avail-able, and ammunition supply.

(4) In the early stages of an attack, prior to the displace-ment of the artillery, a rolling barrage may be fired to befollowed later by concentrations; or, when it is impracticableover the entire front, a rolling barrage may be fired on cer-tain portions thereof.

100

Page 115: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 128-129

(5) In general, concentrations should be employed whenthe front to be covered by each 75-mm battery would exceed100 yards (par. 127b).

(6) The rate of advance, front to be covered, rate of fire,time of beginning, and duration of the barrage are fixed bythe commander ordering the fire. He furnishes the batterycommander with this information, usually in the form of abarrage chart. In order to take full advantage of the neu-tralizing effect of a barrage, the infantry should follow a75-mm barrage at a distance not exceeding 100 to 150 yards.

c. Box barrage.-A box barrage is a specialized type of fireused when making raids on enemy organizations; the areato be raided is enclosed toward the enemy by standing bar-rages. The attack may be supported by a rolling barrageadvancing at a rapid rate through the raided area and restingat the far limit.

* 129. SCHEDULE FIRES.--Schedule fires are fires planned tobe delivered according to a time schedule or on call or signalfrom the supported troops. To provide flexibility for ascheme of schedule fires and to permit close coordinationwith the actual progress of an attack, it is desirable thatthe entire operation be subdivided into maneuver phases,each terminating with the capture of a critical objective.For example, assume that in a certain situation the infantryregimental commander concludes that in order to reach anobjective (as designated by higher authority) he must firstcapture a series of critical terrain features which, from theregimental point of view, are intermediate objectives. Hedecides on an appropriate scheme of maneuver. The opera-tions necessary to capture each intermediate objective aswell as the final objective constitute a maneuver phase sofar as the infantry regiment and its direct-support artilleryunit are concerned. Normally a separate schedule is pre-pared for each of these successive phases, the concluding firesfor each phase, which provide defensive fires to cover theInfantry on the objective, usually coinciding with the initialfires for the next. Each series of fires can then be initiatedor lifted by prearrangement or on call from the supportedunit commander. The schedule is drawn initially to conformto the estimated rate and manner of advance of the supported

101

Page 116: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

129-132 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

unit with relation to the beginning of each maneuver phase.To insure adapting supporting fires to variations in the rateof advance, provision must be made for moving the time ofthe schedule forward or backward and for repeating or elim-inating any part of it.

* 130. PIRES ON TARGETS OF OPPORTUNITY.-Many importanttargets are located which are not included in the schedulefires; they are designated "targets of opportunity." In casean important target presents itself to an artillery unit whichis engaged on schedule fire missions, the artillery commander,in the absence of instructions, decides whether to continue hisschedule fires or to attack the new target. Ordinarily it isinadvisable to designate artillery units exclusively for fire ontargets of opportunity.

11 131. SUPPORTING FIRE.-"SUpporting fire" is a general termapplied to artillery fire delivered while the supported troopsare engaged either in the attack or in the defense; that is,after an attack has been launched either by the supportedtroops or by the enemy. The term is used to designate bar-rages or concentrations delivered for the immediate supportor assistance of an infantry (cavalry) unit during an offensiveor defensive action.

* 132. ARTILLERY PREPARATION.-a. The term "artillery prep-aration" is used to designate intensive artillery fire deliveredduring the period immediately prior to the advance of theInfantry from its line of departure to attack. It is designedto secure domination over the hostile artillery and infantryelements. It may last from 15 minutes to several hours. Itis generally schedule fire.

b. The superior commander determines whether there isto be an artillery preparation, and its kind and duration. Heconsiders the question of tactical surprise, amount of detailknown of the enemy's defensive organization, time availablefor gaining information upon which to base the preparation,extent to which tanks are to support the attack, and amountof ammunition available. The fire delivered and objectivesattacked vary according to the length of the 'preparation;thus, in a short preparation, all the fire may be concentratedon the forward elements of the enemy's troops; while in a

102

Page 117: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 132

long preparation, there is usually in addition much interdic-tion, counterbattery, and other long-range fire.

c. According to circumstances, the duration of the artillerypreparation, when one is fired, may vary considerably asstated in a above. In a meeting engagement, the durationof the preparation, if any, is short. In an attack against astrongly fortified defensive system, the time available forreconnaissance and planning, amount of detail known ofenemy dispositions and defensive works, and ammunitionsupply may permit a preparation of considerable duration.

d. All available artillery usually participates in the prepa-ration if one is prescribed.

e. The preparation should be so planned as to avoid dis-closing to the enemy the front of the main attack.

I. For the preparation fire, the artillery officer of thesuperior unit involved coordinates the fire of all the artilleryWith the unit.

g. To insure concentration of effect, an artillery prepara-tion may be divided into phases.

(1) During the first phase, the army, corps, and divisionartillery are assigned missions in their respective normalzones to neutralize the defender's artillery, dislocate the mostimportant hostile agencies of command and fire control,isolate the defender's forces from their communication withthe rear, and protect our own troops from the enemy'scounterpreparation fires. Artillery fire of the first phaseof preparation thus comprises counterbattery fire; destructionor neutralization fire on command posts, message centers, andsignal communication; interdiction and destruction fire onenemy communication; and neutralization fire on the hostilecenters of resistance. During this phase, the army and divi-sion artillery reinforce the corps artillery in counterbattery.

(2) In the subsequent phase of the preparation, long-rangeheavy artillery continues interdiction and destruction fires onenemy rear areas, these missions increasing in importance asthe enemy, being alerted, disposes his reserves and otherelements to meet the attack. Sufficient corps artillery re-inforces the division artillery. This corps artillery and thedivision artillery neutralize those hostile infantry weapons,centers of resistance, and other enemy elements in the ad-

103

Page 118: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

132-133 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

vance zone of resistance most threatening to the launchingof the attack.

* 133. COUNTERPREPARATION.-A counterpreparation is pre-arranged fire delivered in a defensive action just prior to theenemy attack. Its purpose is to break up hostile attackformations; disorganize the enemy command, observation, andcommunication systems; interfere with his artillery prepara-tion, and impair his morale. Counterpreparations should beplanned to counter each of the probable enemy plans ofattack. The assigned counterpreparation missions should becoordinated with other defensive missions, since the latter areUsually fired immediately following the counterpreparation.Counterpreparations are classified as general, local, andemergency.

a. General.-A general counterpreparation is one plannedto meet a general attack and involves all the artillery capableof firing on the threatened front. In an army, the army com-mander fixes the duration of the general counterpreparationand prescribes conditions under which corps and division com-manders may order it to be fired. Based on the army planof artillery employment, the corps commander prepares theplan for the general counterpreparation of the corps, andsubject to conditions imposed by the army commander, givesorders for its delivery. General counterpreparation fireShould be placed on enemy forces assembled for an attack,including the supports and reserves, and on localities wheresuch assemblies are suspected; also on enemy command posts,on centers of signal communication, and on important linesof communication. The entire front threatened by the gen-eral attack is covered; the division artillery and part of thecorps artillery are employed in fire on the enemy's forwardelements, the remainder of the corps artillery and the armyartillery being employed on distant interdiction and counter-battery missions. The duration of a general counter-preparation usually does not exceed 30 minutes. If severalcounterpreparations are planned, they are designated byletter; as, general counterpreparation A, B, etc.

b. Local.-A local counterpreparation covers only thatportion of the front threatened by a local attack and nor-mally only the division artillery is employed. Local coun-

104

Page 119: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 133-134

terpreparation fires of the division artillery freruently areidentical with its general counterpreparation fires and areplaced on the enemy's forward elements; on enemy forcesassembled for the attack, including supports and reserves,and on localities where such assemblies are suspected; onenemy command posts, centers of signal communication,*and important lines of communication. Local counter-preparations are fired on the division commander's director delegated authority.

c. Emergency.-An emergency counterpreparation is fireplanned by the artillery of one division to. reinforce thelocal counterpreparations of other divisions. An emergencycounterpreparation is fired on the order of the reinforcingdivision commander at the request of a reinforced divisioncommander.

* 134. COUNTERBATTERY.--. Counterbattery fire is fire de-livered for the neutralization or destruction of enemy bat-teries in position. It is a primary function of corps artillery.

b. Supervision of the counterbattery work of a corps isthe function of the corps artillery officer. He designatesan officer as counterbattery officer to function as a memberof the plans and training (S-3) section, with duties per-taining exclusively to the coordination of counterbatteryon the entire corps front. Information pertinent to thedirection and conduct of counterbattery fire (par. 117) isfurnished by the S-2 section of the staff of the corps artil-lery officer, with which section the counterbattery officerworks in close cooperation.

c. The counterbattery system must contain the means forobtaining information of the enemy artillery situation, obser-vation of fire, necessary communication, and sufficient firingunits to deliver and maintain effective fire on the targetsreported. The system is organized by the counterbatteryofficer, who is directly responsible for the preparation andsupervision of the counterbattery plan. The plan shouldinclude-

(1) Types and amount of artillery required.(2) Organization for combat.(3) Zones of responsibility.(4) Position areas.

105

Page 120: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

134-135 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(5) Assignment of specific fire missions.(6) Provision for prompt fire on hostile batteries during

the attack to include arranging for airplane and balloonobservers and coordinating their employment, and coordinat-ing (in conjunction with S-2) the employment of sound-and-flash units.

(7) Communication system to be installed.d. The corps counterbattery artillery will usually contain

medium howitzers and guns. When there are special im-mobile targets definitely located, the 240-mm howitzer orthe 8-inch howitzer may be provided. The 240-mm howitzermust be emplaced initially to fire on specific targets becauseof the time necessary to put it into position and its limitedtraverse. In organizing the counterbattery units, it is desir-able that each unit contain weapons having the range andother characteristics which will enable it to fire on targetslocated in its zone of action. When the number of enemybatteries exceeds the capabilities of the corps counterbatteryartillery, the artillery of the divisions in the corps may bedirected by the corps commander to reinforce the fires of thecorps artillery with a number of units of different calibers fora definite period. In such case, the corps artillery normallyfurnishes the division artillery the information necessary forthe direction and conduct of fire.

e. A counterbattery plan should provide for fire to be de-livered on all known enemy batteries and those discoveredduring the action. Counterbattery is most effectively exe-cuted by concentrating the fire of several batteries, fromdivergent directions, if practicable, on a single enemy bat-tery for the time necessary to establish neutralization,subsequent fire being by a battery or less to maintainneutralization.

f. To silence enemy batteries which may require immedi-ate neutralization during an operation, the counterbatteryofficer must have authority to assign counterbattery missionsdirect to battalions and batteries which have been desig-nated for the purpose, and to accomplish this he should bein direct communication with them.

* 135. INTERDICTION FIRE.-Interdiction fire is fire deliveredon points or areas which it is desired to prevent the enemy

106

Page 121: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUS 135-136

from using. Characteristic targets are roads used for movingsupplies or reserves, crossroads, assembly places, railroad sta-tions, detraining points, defiles, bridges, and fords. Inter-diction may consist of firing at targets as they appear. Whenobservation is impossible, zone fire may be delivered inter-mittently throughout an extended period of time, avoidingregular intervals between rounds or bursts of fire.

[] 136. HARASSING FIRE.-Harassing fire is fire delivered duringa relatively quiet period to interfere with and annoy theenemy, to keep his troops alerted unnecessarily, and to lowerhis efficiency and morale.

107

Page 122: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 4

TACTICAL FUNCTIONS

* 137. TACTICAL ORGANIZATION.-For the purpose of carryingout tactical missions, organic field artillery units as suchmay be employed or units from different field artillery com-mands (organic, attached, or both) may be temporarilygrouped for greater convenience in carrying out these mis-sions. The term "groupment" is applied to the tactical com-mand formed by the temporary grouping of two or morebattalions or larger tactical units assembled from differentorganizations. When it becomes necessary to subdivide agroupment in order to obtain better coordination, such asubdivision is called a "subgroupment."

a. As a basis for forming a groupment or subgroupment,the units composing it should have a common mission. Theorganization of a groupment or subgroupment should beresorted to only when the normal artillery organization isinadequate or unsuitable.

b. In the division, organization for combat should providefor artillery in direct support and artillery in general sup-port, and when necessary, for accompanying artillery andantitank guns; in the corps, groupments for counterbattery,for reinforcement of division artillery, and for long-rangefire; in the army, groupments for long-range fire and forreinforcing corps and division artillery. Such subdivision,however, does not imply exclusive missions for a particulargroupment.

* 138. RECONNAISSANCE.-Timely reconnaissance by all ar-tillery commanders is a prerequisite to the effective employ-ment of artillery. The fundamentals of reconnaissance arecovered in part one.

[ 139. ARTILLERY INTELLIGENCE.-The fundamentals of artil-lery intelligence and the intelligence functions of com-manders and their S-2's are discussed in chapter 2.

* 140. ENTRY OF ARTILLERY INTO ACTION.--a. Positions (pt.one).--(1) Assignment.-Position areas are delimited by

108

Page 123: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 140

higher commanders only to the extent required by theparticular situation.

(2) Occupation.-To avoid disclosing the plan of actionof the commander of the forces and exposing the artillerypositions, the artillery so far as practicable should bebrought into position under cover of darkness; this is par-ticularly important in the case of reinforcing artillery.The order in which reinforcing artillery is brought intoposition depends, in part, upon the degree of secrecy withwhich its positions can be occupied; those units whosepositions afford the least concealment and cover are broughtinto position last. Units designated to occupy exposed posi-tions may be brought into an area relatively early and as-signed concealed and protected positions in readiness nearthe positions to be occupied in action. Those artillery unitswhich are to be held awaiting a more complete developmentof the situation should be assigned positions in readiness.

b. Observation (pt. one) .- All artillery fire is observed whenpossible.

(1) Ground.-Fire conducted with ground observation isseveral times as effective as unobserved fire and the ammuni-tion and time consumed are correspondingly less. The selec-tion of observation posts, when practicable, is left to the unitcommanders concerned. However, to facilitate fire directionor because of congestion in the artillery areas, higher artillerycommanders may allot observation posts to subordinate com-manders. The necessity for observation posts to meet eventu-alities must be foreseen and appropriate map and groundreconnaissance made.

(2) Air (par. 144).-To obtain the best results, air observa-tion for the conduct of fire should be by prearrangement, inwhich case definite plans for the use of air observation mustbe prepared in advance. When possible, the air observershould have a personal conference with the officers of theunits for which he is to observe. During this conference, thelocation and character of targets, details relative to themethod of fire, and means of signal communication (pt. two)to be employed should be discussed and determined. Allo-cation of airplanes and balloons for artillery observation inthe corps and division is a function of the corps, with due

238273 --40--8 109

Page 124: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

140-141 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

regard to requests from the division and from the corps ar-tillery. Based on this allocation, the division and corps ar-tillery officers respectively will prepare their plans for theemployment of air observation.

(3) Sound-and-flash ranging (FM 6-120).-(a) Observa-tion (sound-and-flash) units are important agencies-of theartillery intelligence agencies. Their primary function isthe location of enemy batteries. General plans for the em-ployment of these units are prepared by the corps and armyartillery officers; detailed plans are prepared by the com-manders of artillery brigades (groupments) to which the unitsare assigned or attached.

(b) Sound ranging may be used to adjust fire by soundranging on the burst of the projectile; such adjustment ismost accurate when the location of the target is obtained bysound ranging and the adjustment follows promptly there-after. Flash ranging is used to best advantage in makinghigh burst ranging registrations; it may be used when con-ditions are favorable to locate enemy batteries and to adjustfire.

(c) The installation of a flash-ranging system requiresfrom 4 to 6 hours, the installation of a sound-ranging arefrom 5 to 10 hours. Under adverse conditions of terrain andweather, these times may be increased considerably. Adverseweather conditions may interfere with the employment ofboth flash and sound ranging; enemy or friendly artilleryfire may interfere with the employment of sound ranging.

c. Signal communication.-Prompt establishment of ade-quate signal communication is imperative. The funda-mentals of artillery signal communication are covered inpart two.

* 141. FIRE DIRECTION.-a. General.-(1) In general, fire incombat is delivered against those targets most dangerousto the success of the supported troops. Orders assigningmissions specify or imply the purpose of the fire to be deliv-ered. The artillery commander concerned should be in touchwith the tactical situation in order to appraise properly thepurpose of his particular fire in the general scheme. If thesituation indicates the need for fire other than that beingdelivered in accordance with the orders of the higher com-

110

Page 125: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 141

mander, the artillery commander concerned should immedi-ately report the situation to the next higher commander andask for instructions. If the urgency of the situation is suchas to preclude this report, the artillery commander concernedwill act on his own initiative in accordance with his knowledgeof the general situation, reporting his action to the nexthigher commander as promptly as practicable. In general,artillery commanders of units in direct support should whenin doubt accede to the requests of the Infantry which theysupport.

(2) In its broadest sense, fire direction is the tactical com-mand of one or more fire units for the purpose of bringingtheir fire to bear upon the proper targets at the appropriatetime. In a more restricted sense, it comprises the tacticalemployment of artillery fire to include the location and selec-tion of targets on which fire is to be placed, technique ofdelivery of fire thereon, and allocation of ammunition to firemissions. (See PFM 6-40.)

b. Zones of fire.-The zone within which a particular ar-tillery unit is to be prepared to deliver fire is termed "zoneof fire." That portion of the zone of fire within which thefire of an artillery unit is ordinarily delivered is termed "nor-mal zone." Areas within the zone of fire, other than thenormal zone, within which an artillery unit may be calledupon to fire in certain contingencies, are called "contingentzones." An artillery unit has but one normal zone; it mayhave several contingent zones.

(1) Zones in width.-(a) The normal zone of the divisionartillery coincides laterally with the division zone of actionor sector. The normal zone of a division artillery unit indirect support generally coincides laterally with the zone ofaction or sector of the supported unit; thus a battalion oflight artillery in direct support of an infantry regiment mayhave a normal zone coinciding with the zone of action orsector of the infantry regiment; the batteries in the battalion,not being assigned to the support of a specific infantry unit,have normal zones as designated by the battalion commander.The normal zone of division artillery in general support usu-ally coincides with the zone of action or sector of the divi-sion; however, the normal zones of the battalions of a regi-

111

Page 126: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

141 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

ment in general support may or may not coincide with thezones of action or sectors of the infantry elements (brigades,regiments, battalions).

(b) The normal zone of the corps artillery coincides withthe zone of action or sector of the corps, but the normal zonesof the elements of the corps artillery (regiments, battalions,groupments) may or may not coincide with the zones ofaction or sectors of the front-line divisions of the corps.

(c) The normal zone of the army artillery coincides withthe zone of action or sector of the army; the normal zonesof the elements of the army artillery may or may not coincidewith the zones of action or sectors of the corps.

(2) Zones in depth.-In operations of the corps and largerunits, zones limited in depth may be assigned, for designatedtypes of fire, to division, corps, and army artillery; thus inan area included between the front line of the friendly troopsand a line (usually designated XX) drawn within the enemyposition, parallel to the front line, all interdiction and har-assing fire missions and fire on targets of opportunity wouldbe the responsibility of the division artillery; similarly, firesof these types between this line and a line (usually designatedas ZZ) farther within the enemy position, parallel to thefront, would be executed by corps artillery; and fire beyondthe latter line would be executed by army artillery. Occa-sionally, when a long-range tactical unit is formed in thecorps artillery, the corps zone is divided in depth by a line(usually designated as YY), parallel to the front; this line isused to divide the responsibility in depth between other tac-tical units and the long-range unit.

c. Degree of control.-The degree to which fire directionis exercised by an artillery commander depends upon hisknowledge of the situation, time at his disposal, rapidity ofthe action, efficacy of signal communication, and degree towhich operations are centralized. Whether operations arecentralized or not, the subordinate artillery commanders arepermitted sufficient latitude and initiative to meet local situa-tions promptly and effectively.

d. By units larger than the battalion.-Commanders ofthese units control the fire of lower units by assigning normaland contingent zones, by specifying where the mass of the

112

Page 127: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 141-143

fire will be placed, by designating specific important targetsor areas to be covered by fire, by allocating reinforcingartillery, by organizing the artillery for combat, by procuringammunition and allocating it to lower units, by coordinatingsurvey and the use of radio, and by procuring and coordinat-ing air observation. By directing the preparation of fires onareas of possible danger and by providing for indexing theterrain with the proper distribution of check concentrations,regimental and higher commanders are able to concentratethe fire of their artillery on important targets which developduring the action.

e. Within the battalion.-See FM 6-40.

* 142. CONDUCT OF FIRE (FM 6-40).-a. To employ artilleryfire most effectively with economy of time and ammunitionthere should be the most accurate preparation of fire possible,followed by observed adjustment and fire for effect.

b. Units employed in schedule fires should be afforded anopportunity for the necessary survey, for preparation of fire,and for registration. Such units may be precluded fromregistration by reason of lack of time or to prevent exposingthe battery positions prematurely. In such an event, firemust be prepared as accurately as possible and adjustmentobtained by observation during fire for effect. Preliminaryregistration is of the utmost importance to insure the max-imum effect with the minimum ammunition expenditure.

c. For artillery units to occupy positions at night and firetherefrom during darkness, daylight reconnaissance and sur-vey are indispensable.

* 143. LIAISON (par. 122).--a. Liaison is established andmaintained by the supporting unit at all times during activeoperations.

b. The division light artillery battalions maintain liaisonofficers and liaison sections with supported front-line bat-talions; furthermore, if in direct support of an infantryregiment, the artillery battalion commander maintains aliaison officer at the infantry regimental command post unlesspersonal contact between the commanders is feasible.

c. A light artillery regiment maintains a liaison officer andso much of the liaison section as may be needed at the com-mand post of the supported unit.

113

Page 128: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

143-144 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

d. The artillery commander himself maintains liaison byas close personal contact with the commander of the sup-ported unit as the tactical situation permits. Each artillerycommander charged with direct-support missions shouldestablish his command post near that of the supported unitif compatible with a proper exercise of his command andfire direction functions.

e. Liaison with the division commander is maintainedthrough the close association between him and the divisionartillery officer in the latter's role as division staff officer(par. 109). To insure this close association, the artillerybrigade command post, when the artillery is organized as abrigade, should be located as near as practicable to thedivision command post.

f. Light artillery units attached to divisions and in directsupport of units thereof establish liaison with supported unitsas prescribed for division light artillery. If employed solelyto reinforce the fire of division light artillery, attached lightartillery establishes liaison with the light artillery units whosefires it has been directed to reinforce.

g. Division howitzer units (155-mm or 105-mm) and me-dium and heavy artillery attached to a division normallyestablish liaison with those light artillery units in direct sup-port whose fires they have been directed to reinforce. Insuch instances, liaison sections are placed at the commandposts of the light artillery units; they will be comparativelysmall, often consisting of an officer and one or two men only.

h. Artillery units under corps control establish liaison, whenneeded, with those units of the division artillery which havenormal zones within those of the corps units concerned,

i. In the case of a front-line infantry battalion directly sup-ported by more than one artillery battalion, the commanderof such artillery designates the unit which will provide theliaison section for duty with the infantry battalion. Thissection represents all the artillery supporting the infantrybattalion.

j. Medium and heavy artillery units normally do notestablish liaison with other arms.

* 144. COOPERATION WITH AVIATION (par. 140b(2) ) .--a. Gen-eral.-The responsibility for this cooperation devolves equally

114

Page 129: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 144-146

upon the artillery and aviation commanders concerned.While specific artillery battalions may be designated inadvance to fire specific missions by air adjustments, allbattalions are habitually prepared for such employment.Observation aviation is of particular importance to divisionartillery with security detachments, permitting air adjust-ment of fire when ground observation is not available.

b. Observation aviation.-(1) Battle missions .-When con-tact between the two hostile forces is imminent and the divi-sion zone of responsibility has been defined, division aviationbegins to execute battle missions which include the artillerymissions.

(2) Airplanes.-Observation airplanes assigned to artillerymissions operate directly with the artillery commander. Inaccordance with his instructions, they adjust fire on pre-viously designated targets or on targets located by theobserver and perform surveillance on prearranged and pre-viously adjusted fires. The airplane observer should be as-signed only those missions which are beyond the capabilitiesof both ground and balloon observation.

(3) Balloons.-Balloons habitually observe for the corpsand army artillery and may observe for the division artillery.Normally, the balloon may be given any of the missions ofairplane observation except distant reconnaissance. Balloons'may be attached to artillery units or they may be assignedto observe for the artillery; in the latter case they operateunder the aviation commander.

* 145. AIMUNITION SUPPLY.-Organization of the system ofammunition supply to meet the essential requirements ofcombat is always a major consideration of all artillery com-manders. The ammunition supply system is discussed in partfour.

* 146. DISPLACEMENT (par. 46).-a. To insure continuous firesupport during an attack or a retrograde movement, timelydisplacement of artillery units is necessary. The loss ofartillery fire support may be minimized by so selecting theinitial positions of the artillery units that they will be enabledto fire from such positions for a relatively long time, and byrequiring that the displacements be of as great a length aspracticable.

115

Page 130: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

146 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

b. Plans for displacement should be sufficiently flexible topermit readjustments to meet unforeseen conditions arisingduring the course of the engagement. Essential fire mis-sions of units being displaced should be distributed to unitsin position. Routes should be reconnoitered by the responsi-ble artillery commander preparatory to a displacement. Sincerepair of routes for displacement of artillery units is a func-tion of the engineers, reconnaissance of the responsible artil-lery commander may be made in conjunction with a desig-nated engineer officer. Engineers-may be attached to artilleryunits for making repairs to routes. When two or more unitsof different commands are required to use the same road,coordination of the movement is a function of the next highercommander.

c. So far as practicable, plans for the displacement of unitsshould be prepared in advance. The division, corps, and armyartillery officers prepare plans for the displacement of theartillery of their commands, the plans being submitted totheir respective commanders for approval. Execution of theplan normally devolves on the regimental or groupmentcommanders who are responsible for prescribing the orderof displacement and the redistribution of missions to assurecontinuity of fire. When changes in a displacement plan areeffected by a regimental, groupment, or subordinate com-mander, an appropriate report of the action taken should bemade to the next higher commander. In planning displace-ments, allowance must be made for delays caused by con-gested or damaged routes, hostile artillery fire, or air attacks.

d. In an attack, the displacement of units should be sotimed that the number of batteries in position is the maxi-mum possible at the time of the infantry assault on theenemy's main battle position. The necessity for howitzerfire to reinforce the fire of light artillery units operatingin direct support will require the relatively early displace-ment of medium howitzer units. Long-range fire missionsmay require the early displacement of medium and heavyartillery. To forestall necessity for the early displacementof medium and heavy artillery, units may be held in posi-tions in readiness during the preliminary stages of an en-

116

Page 131: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 146-147

gagement. Displacement of medium and heavy artilleryrequires more time than does displacement of light artillery,and relatively greater care must be exercised in the selectionand preparation of routes.

* 147. PLANS AND ORDERS.-Plans and orders are covered inchapter 6.

117

Page 132: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 5

COMBAT CONSIDERATIONSParagraphs

SEcnorr I. General --...........- ------------------- 148-151II. On the march and at halts ---------- --- 152-158

III. With security detachments ------------------ 159-162IV. Offensive combat ---------------------------- 163-169

V. Defensive combat -- ----- ------------- 170-172VI. Retrograde movements ---------------- 173-178

VII. With Cavalry ---------- - 179-183VIII. In special operations ---------------------- - 184-189

IX. Estimate of artillery requirements …-------- 190-191

SECTION I

GENERAL

U 148. METHOD OF EMPLOYMENT.-Artillery has no inde-pendent role in combat. It is employed in conformity withthe plan of the commander of troops who uses its fire powerto destroy the enemy and his defenses, to disorganize hiscommand, and to neutralize his fire power.

a. Division artillery.-Division artillery (organic and at-tached) is employed against those enemy elements causinglosses to the Infantry (or Cavalry), impeding its advance,or imperiling its security. Light artillerj is normally em-ployed in direct support principally against personnel, ac-companying weapons, tanks, and material targets of smallresistance. Medium artillery reinforces and deepens thefire of light artillery, undertaking missions beyond the rangeor power of the light artillery; fires on targets that the lightartillery is unable to reach; and assists the corps artilleryin counterbattery.

b. Corps artillery.-Corps artillery is used primarily forneutralization or destruction of hostile artillery (counter-battery). Its other principal uses are reinforcing the firesof division artillery, destruction of hostile defenses, neutrali-zation of command posts and troop concentrations, andlong-range interdiction fire.

c. Army artillery.-Army artillery is employed principallyagainst material objectives of an especially resistant nature,

118

Page 133: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 148-150

in counterbattery, and in distant interdiction and destructionfire.

* 149. PLANS FOR EMPLOYMENT.-Prior to an engagement,plans for employment of artillery are prepared and definitemissions assigned each unit in as great detail as time andthe situation permit. Plans must provide for possible even-tualities such as stabilization during the attack, a withdrawal,counterattack, relief during battle, and pursuit following asuccessful attack.

* 150. PLANNING ARTILLERY FIRES.-a. Artillery fires areplanned to provide powerful, deep, and continuous support.Power is obtained by concentrating the mass of fire at thedecisive point at the critical time. Depth is effected by plac-ing all artillery well forward in the attack and by echelonmentof artillery positions in the defense, by taking advantage ofthe different range characteristics of the weapons, and bycareful coordination of the fires of the division, corps, andarmy artillery, as well as fires of division artillery and infantrysupporting weapons. Continuity is effected by taking ad-vantage of the different range characteristics of the weaponsand by timely displacement of the artillery by echelon.

b. The force commander through his artillery officer makesdetailed plans for the use of the artillery held under hisdirect control; in addition, he makes general plans for thecoordinated employment of all artillery with the force. Insubordinate echelons the same methods are applied. Artil-lery battalion commanders of direct-support battalionsperfect the details of support in conference with the sup-ported-infantry commanders.

c. In arranging for coordination of the action of their units,.the commander of the supported unit informs the commanderof the supporting artillery unit of the location of his com-mand post and leading troops, the results of battle recon-naissance, his plan of attack, and the terrain which can becovered by the heavy infantry weapons. Based upon theplan and the facilities for observation, the supporting artillerycommander informs the commander of the supported unit ofthe number and general location of his batteries, presentlocation of the artillery observation posts and those that must

119

Page 134: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

150-152 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

be seized during the advance, and the terrain which theartillery commands with observation and fire. As a resultof the above exchange of information, the associated com-manders come to an agreement as to support to be given bythe artillery and the heavy infantry weapons in the executionof the plan of attack. It is of prime importance that agree-ment be reached as to the known targets to be taken underfire respectively by the artillery and the heavy infantryweapons, and the areas to be kept under surveillance by thesesupporting weapons for targets appearing after the attackis launched, especially those targets in adjacent zones whichare dangerous to the advance of the Infantry. In general,associated infantry and artillery commanders must arrangefor mutual reinforcement of fire so that, should the supportgiven by either the artillery or the heavy infantry weaponsbe deficient because of change of position or difficulties inconduct of fire, the other will compensate for this deficiencyby increasing the intensity and effectiveness of its fire onthe critical targets. The artillery commander meets therequests of the supported Infantry or Cavalry to the limit ofhis capabilities, subject only to orders received from higherauthority.* 151. INFLUENCE OF TERRAIN.-Commanding elevations formthe framework of the systems of observation, command, andfire control in combat. They directly determine the generallocation of artillery positions. Accordingly, the securing ofsuch terrain prior to an attack and its retention during thedefense exercise a decisive influence upon plans and decisions.

SECTION II

ON THE MARCH AND AT HALTS

* 152. GENERAL.-When contact with the enemy is probable,tactical considerations govern march dispositions. These dis-positions are made to provide security and to facilitate de-ployment in accordance with the probable order of entry ofthe units into combat. Artillery commanders march wellforward in the column, intensive reconnaissance is conducted,and the units are subdivided for action.

120

Page 135: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 153

U 153. POSITION IN THE CoLUN.-Artillery should be locatedsufficiently well forward in the column to facilitate its earlyentry into action, but not so far forward as to necessitate arearward movement to take position for firing; it should al-ways have sufficient Infantry (Cavalry) in front of it to affordprotection in event of an enemy surprise attack; and. it shouldbe so disposed in the column as to prevent its coming underenemy machine-gun fire while in a march formation. Whiletruck-drawn artillery can march with Infantry for long pe-riods, it marches more efficiently at greater speeds; accord-ingly, a position in the column should be sought which willpermit it to move by bounds.

a. With security detachments.-As part of an advanceguard, horse-drawn artillery usually marches at or near thetail of the reserve; as part of a rear guard, at the head of thereserve. Truck-drawn artillery usually moves by bounds inthe interval between the advance or rear guard and the mainbody. As part of a flank guard, the artillery moves byparallel roads on the protected flank when the road net isfavorable; otherwise, it marches so as best to facilitate itsentry into action and its protection by the Infantry(Cavalry).

b. With the main body.-(1) In the advance.-The massof horse-drawn artillery usually marches near the head ofthe main body. Truck-drawn artillery in the main bodynormally marches at the rear of the foot and animal combatelements of the column. If the division is marching in oneor two columns only and the road or terrain conditions aresuch as would delay the prompt advance and entry of truck-drawn artillery into action, all or a portion of it may marchnear the head of the main body.

(2) In the retirement.-If the enemy is aggressive, themass of the artillery should march at or near the tail ofthe several columns in order that it may render prompt as-sistance to the security detachments. When the enemy isnot aggressive, the artillery may precede the main body,taking advantage of its relatively greater mobility to relievecongestion in the column of march.

c. Corps artillery.-Corps artillery not attached to divisionsis usually subdivided and moved by stages.

121

Page 136: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

154-155 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

10 154. SUBDIVISIONS ON THE MARCH.-a. March units.-SeeFM 6-5.

b. Battalion ammunition trains.-In the division, ammuni-tion trains of the artillery with the main body usually aregrouped and march in rear of the last combat element of themain body, ammunition trains of the light artillery precedingthose of the medium artillery. Ammunition trains of ad-vance-guard artillery usually march with the main body whenthe columns are short, In long columns and when the ter-rain is unfavorable for rapid movement forward, they shouldbe with the advance guard. An artillery battalion attachedto a flank guard, a rear guard, or a reconnaissance detach-ment should be accompanied by its ammunition train. Adetached battery is accompanied by an appropriate subdivisionof the battalion ammunition train.

[ 155. ANTIAIRCRAFT DEFENSE.-It is essential that artilleryunits are prepared to defend themselves once hostile aircrafthas reached the vicinity of a unit.

a. Warning.-Warning of an impending attack must begiven. Two systems of signals are necessary. First, a systemmust be provided to warn the commander that an attackis imminent. This warning is given by friendly aviation orby a moving cordon of air guards provided by the groundtroops. Next, a system must be provided to pass on theinformation rapidly to the various units in order that theymay prepare for the attack.

b. Passive defense.-Passive defense includes the following:(1) Concealment, by proper utilization of terrain features

and by elimination of lights at night.(2) Dispersion, by using increased distances on the road,

by moving on a broad front in cross-country movements,and by scattering vehicles in roadside bivouacs and, whentime permits, during halts.

(3) Halting the column. during an attack to reduce dam-age caused by vehicles out of control.

c. Active defense.-The automatic rifle is the principalweapon of defense; the automatic pistol is capable of effectagainst low-flying airplanes. Antiaircraft defense of artilleryin position is covered in part one.

122

Page 137: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 156-158

* 156. DEFENSE AGAINST MECHANIZED FORCES.-Although theprotection of marching columns of artillery is primarily theresponsibility of the supported arms, the artillery miSt beprepared to use all its means of defense against mechanizedattacks.

a. Passive defense.-Through reconnaissance and liaison,every effort is made to secure information of the presenceof mechanized forces. Where possible, the route is plannedso as to use terrain unfavorable to the employment of mech-anized forces. While there will be little opportunity to erectartificial obstacles, yet in some cases the artillery may usesome of its own vehicles to block roads or defiles and thusgain time to allow the remainder of the column to escape.Obstacles must be covered by fire. In the case of truck-drawnartillery, speed of the vehicles may be used to avoid theattack. Use of increased distances will localize losses andmay present a target so dispersed as not to warrant an attackby a mechanized force.

b. Active defense.-Active defense includes fire with auto-matic weapons and where practicable with field pieces. De-fense against mechanized forces by artillery in position iscovered in part one.

* 157. NIGHT MARCHES.-a. Because of limitations in employ-ment of artillery at night, it. usually marches at the tail ofthe main body and the artillery components of securitydetachments are omitted. A long, close column of artilleryis particularly vulnerable to air attack at night; when suchattack is expected, artillery columns should be broken upinto small march units with extended distances betweenindividual vehicles. Special precautions must be taken toinsure the maintenance of direction and connection withinthe column.

b. If the night march is to be extended into hours of day-light, the march is organized as for a daylight march (pars.153, 154, and 160) or the necessary measures are taken atdaylight for reinforcing the advance guard.

* 158. HALTS IN PRESENCE OF THE ENEMY.-When contact withthe enemy is probable or has been gained and the com-mand is going into bivouac, the artillery with the main body

123

Page 138: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

158-159 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

is located in proximity to previously reconnoitered positionsfrom which it can support the outpost and assist in gainingthe time necessary to enable the Infantry of the main bodyto deploy,

SECTION III

WITH SECURITY DETACHMENTS

* 159. OUTPOSTS.--a. March outposts.-During halts on amarch, the artillery with an advance or rear guard may beplaced in position to cover probable avenues of enemyapproach and to protect commanding ground in the vicinityof the route of march.

b. Troops in bivouac.-(1) Artillery with main body.-Thecommander of troops issues instructions as to artillery supportto be rendered to the outpost by the artillery of the mainbody. Such instructions prescribe positions for the artillery,degree of readiness desired, and nature of the artillery sup-port. The commander of the artillery so designated conferswith the outpost commander, establishes liaison as necessary,and takes appropriate steps to render the prescribed artillerysupport.

(2) Artillery attached to outpost.-The outpost commanderdesignates the general position of the artillery, prescribeswhether it shall be in position or posted in readiness, andassigns the artillery mission. An important consideration inthe designation of positions for the artillery and in assign-ment of missions is that the artillery be able to place fireon the enemy avenues of approach, on areas constitutingdead spaces for infantry weapons, and on other criticalareas. Defensive fires are prepared. The command post ofthe outpost artillery commander should be in close proximityto that of the outpost commander. Artillery liaison shouldbe established with those elements of the support coveringcritical points of the line of resistance. When necessary,provision for artillery antitank defense is made.

c. Outposts covering a defensive position.-(1) As a cov-ering detachment.-(a) When the mission of the coveringdetachment is to delay the enemy and withdraw before be-coming closely engaged, only so much artillery is attachedto it as is necessary for the long-range interdiction of the

124

Page 139: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 159-160

main routes of hostile advance. The artillery is deployed ona wide front in positions affording a good field of fire at longrange. Reconnaissance for screened routes of withdrawalshould be instituted promptly.

(b) When the covering detachment's mission is to holduntil ordered to withdraw, the strength in artillery is increasedand the position occupied by the covering detachment isorganized as a defensive position. Positions for reinforcingartillery are located and prepared so that artillery of themain body may be displaced forward in case the higher com-mander decides to resume the offensive or to hold the cover-ing position.

(c) The withdrawal of the covering detachment is protectedby a part of the artillery of the main body; this may requirethat some batteries be emplaced in temporary positions infront of the main battle position. Artillery of the coveringdetachment, upon reaching the main battle position, revertsto the control of the higher artillery commander.

(2) As part of the defensive organization.-Artillery sup-port of the outpost area is furnished by artillery emplacedin the battle position unless the depth of the outpost area isso great as to preclude adequate support from such positions,in which event some artillery is emplaced in the outpost area.

U 160. ADVANCE GUARDS.-a. Infantry strength of the ad-vance guard, the situation, terrain, and time of day deter-mine whether artillery will be attached to the advanceguard as well as the amount to be attached. Except forspecial operations or when the terrain and road net aresuch that support by the artillery with the main bodywould be unduly delayed, it is seldom necessary to attachartillery to an advance guard the size of an infantry bat-talion. It is usual to support an advance guard of thissize by artillery with the main body. When the attach-ment of artillery to such an advance guard becomes neces-sary, usually one battery is attached. For larger advanceguards, the attachment of a battalion of light artillery isusually appropriate.

b. The advance guard artillery commander accompaniesthe advance guard commander during the march; artilleryliaison personnel march with the support. A reconnaissance

238273'-40-9 125

Page 140: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

160-161 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

party marches with the Cavalry or with the leading ele-.ments of the advance guard and conducts continuous re-connaissance for observation posts and position areas.When combat is imminent artillery of the advance guard,if more than one battery, may be echeloned forward, pre-pared to go into action promptly. One echelon is postedin readiness or in position so that it can give immediatesupport to the advance guard when required. The otherechelon moves to a more advanced position. The artillerythus advances by echelon, continuously prepared to renderimmediate support if hostile resistance is encountered. Tobe of value, batteries thus placed in position must haveobservation posts readily accessible, air observation, or ef-fective radio communication between the unit in positionand the artillery liaison or forward observers with theinfantry.

c. If the mission of the advance guard is aggressive, theartillery supports the advance of the Infantry (or Cavalry)by fire on those enemy elements offering the greatest re-sistance to the advance of the supported unit. It seeks toneutralize the enemy artillery and infantry supportingweapons opposing the main attack and to break up coun-terattacks, particularly those opposing the main effort. Ef-fective counterbattery fire is dependent upon good observa-tion, which usually necessitates the use of observationaviation. Batteries are pushed well forward, with littleechelonment in depth, to permit fire at maximum ranges.

d. If the mission of the advance guard is defensive, theartillery is employed to delay the advance of the enemyby forcing early deployment of his columns, to break uphis attack formation, and to support counterattacks. Whilepositions permitting fire well into the enemy lines aredesirable, it is usual to echelon the batteries in depth inorder to permit fires close in front of, or within, theposition.

* 161. REAR GUARDS.-a. Rear guards should be relativelystrong in artillery. The rear guard of a division seldomincludes less than a battalion of light artillery; it may in-clude one or more regiments of light artillery and one ormore battalions of medium artillery. Truck-drawn artil-

126

Page 141: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 161

lery is especially suitable for use with rear guards. Itssuperior mobility under favorable conditions permits it toremain in action longer and to displace more rapidly thanhorse-drawn artillery. In the retirement of larger units,the rear guard may be reinforced by corps artillery. Inthe execution of its mission, the rear guard fights delayingactions in successive positions or in one position. Earlyand careful reconnaissance is necessary to insure that suit-able routes are available for displacement of the artilleryand that no obstruction will block the movement.

b. When in contact with the enemy, the rear guard de-ploys on a broad front, occupying the stronger tacticalpositions in strength and covering the intervals with fire.The artillery should be placed relatively near the front linewith little or no disposition in depth, in order to be ableto fire well into hostile territory, covering the principalroutes of hostile advance and the flanks of the rear guard.

c. In general, fire of the artillery is directed against thoseenemy forces most menacing to the retiring column. Fireis opened on the heads of the enemy's columns thus forcingan early deployment and is continued on successive columnsand bodies of the enemy as they appear. Interdiction andcounterbattery missions are assigned as appropriate.

d. In withdrawal from a position, movement usually beginswith a rearward displacement of the artillery by echelonfollowed by a rearward echelonment of the Infantry; theCavalry, withdrawing last, covers the retirement of the artil-lery and Infantry. Routes selected for withdrawals shouldafford cover from enemy fire and should be such that duringwithdrawal the artillery will not mask the fire of friendlytroops which have previously been echeloned to the rear.Throughout withdrawal of the rear guard, artillery fire sup-port should be continuous; elements of artillery echeloned tothe rear should open fire before the forward elements leavetheir positions. In order that the number of movements bereduced to a minimum, thus assuring a maximum of artilleryfire support, each position should when practicable be suchas to permit the artillery, without changing position, tosupport more than one of the delaying positions.

127

Page 142: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

161-164 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

e. In a rear-guard action, the ammunition supply plan ofthe artillery should provide for resupply of the battalionammunition trains by establishment of rolling reserves ofammunition at supply points along the route of withdrawal.*] 162. FLANK GUARDS.-a--. Artillery is usually attached to aflank guard when the need for considerable resistance is ex-pected. When there is no artillery with the flank guard,the artillery of the main body is disposed in column so as tofacilitate its early entry into action to support the flankguard. The use of truck-drawn artillery with flank guardsprovides the high degree of mobility desirable.

b. A flank guard when engaged fights a delaying or a de-fensive action; the artillery is employed in general as in therear guard.

c. If the defense is based on successive occupation of keypositions parallel to the line of march, protection of theartillery while changing positions falls primarily on troopsof the other arms; however, the artillery commander shouldrequire a reconnaissance by artillery personnel to be madeon the exposed flank of the line of march and should disposethe automatic rifles of the command so that they can beemployed readily in both ground and air defense of themoving column.

SECTION IV

OFFENSIVE COMBAT

* 163. GENERAL.-In the offensive, the usual forms of attackemployed are penetration and envelopment. An attackusually consists of two principal elements; a main or decisiveattack and a secondary or holding attack.

* 164. ARTILLERY MISSIONS.-a. General.-The bulk of theartillery is employed in support of the main attack. However,provision is made for the mutual support of the artillery withboth the main and holding attacks unless these attacks arebeyond mutual supporting distance.

(1) In a penetration, the bulk of the artillery fire is placedin advance and on the flanks of the penetrating force.

(2) In an envelopment, the bulk of the artillery supportsthe main attack and definite assignments of artillery units

128

Page 143: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 164

to support each attack are made. The location of the ar-tillery should be such that, in the event the holding forceis seriously threatened, the mass of the artillery will beable to support it. So far as practicable, the artillery isemployed to assist in creating the impression that the hold-ing attack is an attack in force.

(3) When the main and holding attacks are beyondmutual supporting distance, it is usually necessary to attacha part of the artillery and hold the remainder under cen-tralized control. This attachment may be to the main at-tack force or to the holding attack force, depending uponwhether the force commander remains with the holdingattack or takes personal command of the main attack force.

b. Division artillery.-The targets engaged are those ofimmediate importance to the Infantry which the divisionartillery supports. In the absence of corps and army artillery,the division artillery includes in its missions those normallypertaining to the larger calibers.

(1) Appropriate missions for the division light artillery indirect support of the friendly Infantry are neutralizationof the enemy Infantry and automatic weapons, and destruc-tion of lightly constructed defenses. Prior to arrival of theheavier weapons, it executes the necessary counterbattery.

(2) Appropriate missions for the division medium artil-lery are neutralization of hostile Infantry, destruction ofdefensive works of moderate strength, concentrations be-yond those of the light artillery, deepening a rolling bar-rage, neutralization of hostile observation, and interdictionand harassing fires. It may assist the corps in counter-battery.

c. Corps and army artillery.-The primary mission of corpsartillery is counterbattery. Other missions include neu-tralization of command posts and enemy troop concentra-tions, interdiction of routes, and destruction of obstaclesand defenses. In addition, corps artillery supplements theaction of the division artillery by deepening and thickeningits fire. Army artillery, when present, assists the corpsartillery in counterbattery and takes over the more distantmissions.

129

Page 144: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

164 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

d. Phases of artillery ftre.--On the offensive, artillery firesare divided into fires prior to the artillery preparation, theartillery preparation, and supporting fires during the at-tack. These three categories are primarily tactical. Actu-ally, much of the artillery (especially Corps and ArmyArtillery) may continue on the same missions throughoutthe various phases of the attack.

(1) Prior to the preparation.-These fires comprise, asappropriate, support of advance guard actions and of devel-opment and deployment, support of preliminary combat todrive in enemy covering forces and to develop the enemymain position, harassing fire, long-range interdiction, attackof strongly fortified points of enemy reserve positions, gasmissions, and counterbattery.

(2) Preparation fire.-See paragraph 132.(3) During the attack.-(a) The bulk of supporting fire

is in the form of concentrations. However, the use of roll-ing barrages over a portion of the front is not precluded,particularly in the zone of advance of the main attack.

(b) Counterbattery and long-range interdictions and de-struction fires are continued.

(c) The fire is massed on the front of the main attackso as to facilitate the advance of assaulting troops andprotect their flanks. It is important that hostile infantrysupporting weapons, especially machine guns, are neutral-ized while the attacking Infantry is advancing to theassault, and that the enemy is prevented from occupyingfire trenches or manning their weapons as the assault ap-proaches its objectives. In areas beyond probable enemymachine-gun positions, fire is concentrated on enemy rearpositions, observation posts, command posts, signal com-munication centers, and reserves.

(d) Supporting artillery fires should be planned (pars.129 and 150) in advance to the extent that the Infantrycan plan its scheme of maneuver and can estimate whenand where supporting fires will be required. Schedule sup-porting fires must be susceptible of change to meet emer-gencies observed by the artillery or reported by liaison of-ficers or the supported Infantry. Neutralization is main-tained on a locality to be attacked until such time as the

130

Page 145: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE · 164-167

Infantry is prepared to deliver its assault thereon. Whenpracticable, the time at which the fire is to be lifted isarranged in advance; otherwise, it lifts on call from theInfantry made either directly or through the artillery liaisonofficers, or when the need therefor is observed by the artil-lery; when the fire is lifted by prearranged signal, such asa rocket from the Infantry, great care is necessary to avoidconfusion.

e. Use ol chemicals.-There are no restrictions on theuse of nonpersistent gas except that it must be fired asufficient time in advance of the arrival of the supportedtroops at the objective to permit their advance without gasmasks. The use of persistent gas is restricted to certainportions of the ground which the supported troops will notoccupy or over which it will not be necessary for them topass. When persistent gas is used, precautions are takenthat all units are informed of such fires.

* 165. POSITIONS (par. 140).--Positions selected for the massof artillery should be well forward so that continuous sup-port can be rendered as long as practicable without dis-placement. Usually those units which are to remain longestin position (artillery of the GHQ reserve and artillery ofreserve divisions) are placed in the most advanced locations.

* 166. CONTROL.-a. During preparation.-Army and corpscommanders will usually coordinate the action of all artil-lery participating in the preparation fire.

b. During attack.-Normally, the division artillery is heldunder control of the division commander in order that hemay favorably influence the course of battle by concen-trating artillery fire where and when desired.

c. During exploitation.-The attack may break up into aseries of separate combats conducted by local infantry com-manders whose mission is to push on to the area of theenemy artillery or deeper. When such conditions are fore-seen, arrangements are made in advance for the employ-ment of units of attached artillery and are effected as soonas centralized control becomes impracticable.

[ 167. EVENTUALITIES IN AN ATTACK.-a. Halts in the ad-vance.-Troops halted for reorganization or other cause

131

Page 146: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

167 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

must be protected by artillery fire. If the check is local incharacter and of relatively minor importance, the artilleryoriginally assigned to support the unit will resume its sup-porting fires as the attacking unit resumes its advance; ifthe check is general in character or if, even though involvingbut a relatively small force, it is of major importance, an ar-tillery preparation may be fired preliminary to resumptionof the advance. If the check is of short duration, supportingfires should, so far as practicable, be a resumption or adapta-tion of the fires initially planned; if the check is of longduration and the situation justifies the disruption of theschedule fires initially planned, all or part of the artilleryelements may be displaced if practicable during the halt andthe plan of prearranged supporting fires rearranged accord-ingly; the advance may be preceded by a preparation.

b. Enemy counterattacks.-Based on early information,-concentrations should be placed on the enemy troops as they:assemble for a counterattack. In the event of a relativelyunimportant local counterattack, the concentrations may befired by the artillery designated to render normal support,,supplemented by the fire of units which can be readily di-verted from their normal missions without jeopardizing the:general plan of attack. In the event of a general counter-attack or of an important local counterattack, the fire of the-division artillery should be supplemented by fire of the corps:and the army artillery.

c. Relief in battle.-During the course of the relief of in-:fantry units in battle, the artillery should be employed on-defensive fire missions; zones designated for these fires aregenerally the same as the zones for supporting fire duringthe attack. Infantry and its supporting artillery ordinarily.should not be relieved at the same time nor during the samenight.

d. Pursuit.-Plans must provide for prompt forward dis-placement of the division artillery; for the attachment, asnecessary, of artillery to units designated to pursue; for theredistribution of fire missions in order to permit this attach-ment; for timely and adequate ammunition supply; and forthe employment of the corps and the army artillery to furtherthe disorganization of the enemy forces by long-range fire.

132

Page 147: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 168

* 168. ATTACK IN A MEETING ENGAGEMENT.--a. A meetingengagement results from the contact of two hostile forces,neither of which is fully developed for battle.

b. As contact becomes imminent, the artillery of the ad-vance guard operates as in paragraph 160. Other artilleryincreases its readiness for action. The artillery unit com-manders move forward in the column, reconnaissance isintensified, and the units are subdivided for action.

c. When contact has been gained with strong enemy re-sistance, the column commander promptly orders into actionsuch artillery units of the main body as may be neededto support the advance guard and cover development ofthe Infantry. The artillery not employed immediately isprepared for prompt entry into action as soon as the situationbecomes clarified.

d. The division medium artillery is placed in position assoon as practicable for the execution of counterbattery mis-sions and long-range fire on enemy columns.

e. Although initially the separate column commanders arepermitted to employ their attached artillery as the localsituation may require, the division commander through hisartillery officer centralizes control of the artillery in hisown hands at the earliest practicable moment. Unless other-wise specified, the artillery in the advance guard reverts toits normal command when field orders for the attack arereceived. When a major portion of the division artilleryis used to reinforce the advance guard artillery, the lattershould revert to normal command at once to permit propercoordination of fire.

I. Those artillery units committed to action during theearly phases of the combat but not in positions suitable forthe attack are moved prior to the attack.

g. In the absence of corps artillery, the division artilleryexecutes counterbattery and distant interdiction.

h. By the time the Infantry has arrived on the line ofdeparture, all the artillery should be in position preparedto support the Infantry in the attack.

i. Usually no preparation is fired because of the limitedamount of ammunition available in such a moving situation.

133

Page 148: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

1.68-169 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

j. Prearranged artillery supporting fires are usually limitedto concentrations to cover the initial advance of the Infan-try from its line of departure. They are supplemented orfollowed by fires as called for by liaison officers or by fireson targets of opportunity observed from artillery observationposts.

k. To assure continued support, the artillery commander,when the progress of the attack warrants, issues timelyinstructions for the forward displacement of artillery units.

* 169. ATTACK OF AN ORGANIZED POSITION.---. The degreeto which a position may be organized is limited only by thetime and facilities available to the defender. Organizationmay vary between that of a hastily occupied position char-acterized by lack of depth, hastily constructed defensiveworks, and incomplete provisions for command, supply,observation, and coordinated action of elements of the defen-sive force, and that of a strongly fortified defensive systemon a stabilized front in which successive positions are pre-pared with defense areas or switch positions, or both, con-necting the positions, and with complete provision made forthe coordination of command, supply, observation, and firesupport.

b. An attack against an organized position differs from thatin a meeting engagement in that more time usually is avail-able to study the enemy's position and dispositions, assignmissions and objectives, prearrange supporting fires, organizecommand and observation posts, and perfect the systems ofsignal communication, liaison, and ammunition supply.

c. In general, the enemy will attempt to screen his mainposition and deceive the attacker as to his dispositions by theemployment of covering forces and it may be necessary forthe leading troops of the attacking force to execute a "recon-naissance in force" against critical points in the enemy's out-post zone. The object of this reconnaissance in force is tobreak through the hostile screen, drive in the defender's cov-ering forces, and seize terrain which will permit the properdeployment of the command, especially of the artillery, andgive an insight into the hostile battle position.

d. The bulk and sometimes all of the division artillery isemployed to support the troops executing the reconnaissance

134

Page 149: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 169

in force. Artillery not engaged reconnoiters the enemy posi-tion and its assigned position areas and prepares for entryinto action; survey operations and other necessary measuresto insure the maximum accuracy of fire are provided for;prearrangement of fire is planned to the extent that the,supported Infantry can plan its operations; facilities of ob-servation aviation and sound-and-flash units are exploited tothe utmost to locate artillery targets, particularly enemy bat-teries; artillery not already in position moves to rendezvousor positions in readiness, from which it moves to attack posi-tions under cover of darkness or smoke. A night occupationof position must be carefully prepared in order to preservesecrecy and avoid confusion. All preparatory measuresshould be completed during daylight hours, including the.marking of positions and routes of approach, establishmentof observation posts and signal communication, and prepara-tion of fire.

e. When available, corps artillery is employed on counter-battery and to interfere with the strengthening of enemy'positions and construction of new positions to which the-enemy might retire. Until the situation has developed suf-ficiently, part of the corps artillery may be held in readiness.

f. In an attack on a stabilized front, the location and ex-tent of the enemy's defensive positions are fully known and.the attack opens with a coordinated assault.

g. The attack is usually preceded by a preparation.h. (1) Supporting fires in the attack are in the form of

concentrations or rolling barrages or both and are coordi-nated with machine-gun and mortar fires and with the op-erations of tanks. Plans should provide for the advancementof artillery fire according to a time schedule which may be.modified when necessary to meet the needs of the assault.troops.

(2) Fire in the attack should be of sufficient depth to in-clude all enemy installations imperiling the advance of the-attacking troops. The density of artillery fire, particularlyin support of the main attack, should be sufficient to over-come effective rifle and machine-gun fire on the immediatefront of the advancing troops. The general density of sup--porting fire at greater depths is less than on the criticalelements of the enemy's organization. The division medium

135

Page 150: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

169 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

artillery is employed to give depth and volume to the fire ofthe division light artillery and to fire on enemy reserves andon objectives which cannot be neutralized by light artilleryfire.

(3) When the enemy's main battle position has been pene-trated and the enemy is disorganized and withdrawing torearward positions, the attachment of some artillery to in-fantry assault units is often necessary to take care of unfore-seen resistance. Arrangements usually are made in advancefor such attachments.

(4) Artillery that is to revert to higher command, onceits limit of range from initial positions is reached, is givenorders as early as is practicable governing its subsequentmovement and disposition.

(5) During the attack, corps and army artillery reinforcethe division artillery fires and fire on targets beyond therange or power of the division artillery. The corps artillery,reinforced by the army artillery as necessary, fires counter-battery missions. Army artillery missions include fire onenemy troop concentrations and interdiction of lines ofcommunication.

i. In a well-organized defensive system, the distance be-tween the enemy's positions is usually such that the attack-.er's artillery must be moved forward in order to support theattack against the enemy's second position. Provisions fordisplacement are therefore included in the plan of attack(par. 146).

The displacement usually is made by echelon, the numberof units to be moved at one time being governed by routesavailable and necessity of furnishing continuous support.The total number of units to be moved is limited by theammunition that can be supplied to the forward positions.:Normally, the heavy artillery continues to fire from its initialpositions until the light and medium artillery have beendisplaced.

j. (1) Plans for the attack of an organized position shouldprovide for heavy reinforcement of organic artillery in orderto overcome the highly organized resistance to be encoun-tered throughout the main battle position. The required-artillery strength appropriate for the attack of positions with

136

Page 151: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 169-170

varying degrees of organization are set forth in paragraph191.

(2) Preliminary measures are initiated at an early dateby the commanders of the artillery in position, both for theirown units and for the reinforcing units, and include so faras practicable all the preparations necessary for the organicand reinforcing units in the attack.

(3) The artillery is organized for combat as provided inparagraph 137.

(4) Positions for the reinforcing artillery must be selectedand all possible preparatory measures completed before itarrives. These preparatory measures are initiated by theorganic artillery commanders and are completed by advancedetails of the reinforcing artillery.

(5) On arrival, reinforcing artillery is located in concealedareas out of range of hostile artillery fire. Reconnaissanceand preparations for orderly movements into positions aremade. Movements into position take place under cover ofdarkness and in accordance with a march table. In large at-tacks, several nights may be necessary for such movements.The order of movement is as follows: batteries which movedirectly into concealed firing positions, batteries which moveinto concealed positions in readiness from which they canbe quickly moved into firing positions near by, and batterieswhich move directly into positions in the open. The latterare moved on the night preceding the attack.

k. Distribution of ammunition is planned in advance andbegins before the reinforcing artillery moves into position.Sufficient ammunition is dumped in the vicinity of the firingpositions for missions which are to be fired prior to dis-placement.

SECTION V

DEFENSIVE COMBAT

* 170. GENERAL.-Defense of a position, whether it is hastilyprepared or strongly fortified, is conducted in accordance withthe same fundamentals. Details of execution, however, varydepending on whether or not the commander contemplatesan early resumption of the offensive, the strength of the posi-

137

Page 152: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

170-171 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

tion, means available for its defense, and action of theenemy.

5 171. EARLY RESUMPTION OF OFFENSIVE NOT CONTEMPLATED.-

a. General.-(1) Development of the command in the pre-liminary stages of occupation of the defensive position is ingeneral similar to that in the offensive. Troops are movedto assembly positions and then into positions to be occupiedin the defense proper; sectors are assigned; operations of theelements of the command are coordinated; and the positionis organized, fires are coordinated, and the systems of com-mand, signal communication, observation liaison, and am-munition supply are developed as time permits. Exact infor-mation as to the trace of the main line of resistance is fur-nished to the artillery.

(2) Occupation of the defensive position by large units iswhenever practicable covered by outposts (par. 159) locatedat sufficient distance from the main line of resistance toprevent the occupying forces from being taken under ob-served fire by hostile light artillery. The force commanderdecides whether the outposts are to retain their position afteroccupation of the main line of resistance has been completed.If the position of the outpost is not within effective rangeof the artillery supporting the defense of the main position,some light artillery is attached to the outpost.

(3) When the situation permits, mobile covering detach-ments with truck-drawn light artillery and when appropriatemedium artillery attached, operate well in front and towardexposed flanks of the defensive position. By their fire, dispo-sition, and movements they endeavor to deceive the enemy asto the defensive dispositions, lead him in a false direction,and cause him to deploy prematurely and on incorrect lines.Deploying on a broad front, they occupy successive positionson commanding ground and take advantage of every oppor-tunity to open heavy surprise fire on formed bodies of hostiletroops, without, however, allowing themselves to becomeclosely engaged.

b. Artillery observation.-In selecting defensive positions,one of the primary factors is the availability of adequateground observation for the artillery and the locating of thedefensive lines to afford the maximum protection for this ob-

138

Page 153: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 171

servation. Observation is organized to reduce invisible areasto a minimum and to provide for utilization of rearward ob-servation posts in case of failure of observation posts locatedin the battle position.

c. Control of artillery.-The ability of artillery to mass itsfire in critical areas or on important objectives is paramount;hence, centralized control is essential.

d. Time of opening fire.-Higher commanders determinethe conditions under which artillery fire is to be opened dur-ing the hostile approach. In determining the time for open-ing fire, consideration is given to the fact that prematureopening of fire by the mass of the artillery gives the enemyinformation relative to the location of the position and de-ployment of the artillery and that he may employ weakdetachments for the purpose of inducing the defender to openfire and reveal his dispositions. Fire is not opened by themass of the artillery until targets of sufficient importanceare disclosed.

e. Artillery missions.-(1) General.-In general, the mis-sion of the artillery is to prevent the enemy from launchinga coordinated attack and to assist in stopping an attackshould one be made. Normally, the general mission assignedinitially to the artillery should indicate where the preponder-ance of support or the mass of fire is to be placed, or anypriority to be given in preparing for support of different partsof the defensive position. Plans for delivery of defensive firesmust be designed to provide concentrations of fire only on thecritical zones or fronts; because sufficient artillery will rarelybe available, even distribution of fire along the entire frontwould result in so little density as to be ineffective. In deter-mining the detailed missions of the artillery, operations inci-dent to a defense may be considered as divided into phasesas follows: the period prior to and during the forming of theenemy for attack; the attack proper; and, in certain situa-tions, the defender's counterattack.

(a) Missions appropriate to the first phase are interdictionof enemy routes of approach, harassing fire, support of cov-ering detachments, fire on targets of opportunity, counter-preparation, and counterbattery.

139

Page 154: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

171 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(b) Missions appropriate to the phase covered by the attackproper are fire on attacking troops intended to break up thecohesion and momentum of the assault waves before theyreach the main battle position, fire on troop assemblies,counterbattery, standing barrages, and interdiction.

(c) Relative to the third phase, artillery should be preparedat all times, following the launching of the enemy attack, tosupport counterattacks. As the time, place, and directionof counterattacks cannot be definitely foreseen, it is necessarythat the artillery prepare plans to support such possiblecounterattacks as may have been designated by the divisioncommander. In a counterattack by the division reserve, asmuch of the division artillery as practicable participates.Such a counterattack may be preceded by a preparation andmay be reinforced by corps artillery and by artillery of adja-cent divisions. Support in a local counterattack is providedfor in conference between the local infantry commander andthe commander of the supporting artillery. In such counter-attacks, the local artillery commander should request suchreinforcing fire as may be necessary. Normally, it is impera-tive that fire in support of counterattacks be observed con-tinuously, liaison personnel being used as in the attack.Assignment of artillery to direct support of counterattacksand the artillery fires to be executed are planned in suchdetail as is practicable to insure maximum coordination ofeffort.

(2) Division artillery.-Fire of the division artillery mustbe coordinated with the fire of infantry weapons. Plans forsupporting fires, particularly barrage fires in close defense ofthe position, must be prepared promptly. The division artil-lery participates in counterpreparation and takes under firethe most advanced elements of the assault waves; in addi-tion, in certain situations, it assists the corps artillery incounterbattery fires for neutralization, and by fire in thecorps artillery normal zone.

(3) Corps and army artillery.-When corps artillery ispresent, it will take over its primary mission of counterbatteryand long range fire missions. During the critical stages ofthe defense, the corps artillery will reinforce and deepen thefires of the division artillery by firing on critical areas and on

140

Page 155: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 171

hostile reserves. When army artillery is present, it normallywill relieve the corps artillery of the more distant missions.

f. Prearrangement and coordination of artillery fires.-(1)When practicable, coordination of fires should be effected onthe entire front, both laterally and in depth. This coordina-tion involves measures to tie together artillery fires of adjacentunits and artillery fires of the different echelons, such asdivision and corps, and corps and army. Even in rapidlymoving situations, some coordination of artillery fire usuallyis practicable. Artillery commanders arrange with com-manders of the supported troops the details of defensive firesof the artillery, coordinating them with those of the supportedunits. A general attack is met with a series of fires which seekto prevent the launching of a coordinated attack and to breakup and destroy the enemy attack formations, should one bemade. If the attack succeeds in penetrating the position,the artillery assists in limiting the penetration and in effectingejection of the enemy, or if necessary, covers the withdrawalto rear positions, or delays pursuit.

(2) (a) Fires employed in the order of the usual priorityof preparation are-

1. For division artillery.First-Standing barrages for close defense of the

main line of resistance.Second-Defensive concentrations covering ave-

nues of possible approach to the main line ofresistance.

Third-Other defensive fires beyond the mainline of resistance.

Fourth-Counterpreparation fires.Fifth-Fires within the battle position to limit

penetrations or envelopments.Sixth-Fires in support of counterattacks.Seventh--Fires covering a possible withdrawal.

2. For corps and army artillery.First-Counterbattery, interdiction, and harass-

ing fires.Second-Fires to deepen and thicken the fires

of the division artillery for close defense ofthe main line of resistance.

238273--40-10 141

Page 156: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

1.71 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

Third-Counterpreparation fires.Fourth-Fires within the battle position to limit

penetrations or envelopments.Fifth-Fires in support of counterattacks.Sixth-Fires covering a possible withdrawal.

(b) When appropriate, fires to support the action of cov-ering forces should be given high priority.

(3) The degree of prearrangement and coordination ofsupporting fires by higher commanders depends upon thetime available, ranging from a hastily prepared plan to anelaborate system of fires. Not all the above fires are usedin each situation, nor are they necessarily fired simul-taneously all along the front. General counterpreparationsare fired when ordered by higher commanders (par. 133),local counterpreparations on the orders of the commandersconcerned. Other fires are executed on request of the sup-ported unit or on the initiative of subordinate artillerycommanders when the necessity or advisability therefor isindicated by observation or report; they may be ordered byhigher authority.

g. Positions.-Based upon a consideration of the mis-sions, the artillery should normally be echeloned in depthin rear of the regimental reserve line. This echelonmentmay be by battalion within regiments or by battery withinbattalions. All batteries must be able to fire in close defenseof the main line of resistance. From one-half to two-thirdsof the light batteries should be able to fire in close supportof the regimental reserve line. Some artillery should beemplaced well forward, generally just in rear of the regi-mental reserve line, in order to execute harassing and inter-diction fires deep in the enemy zone. Part of the artillerywill be required to support the outpost, either from itsbattle position or from temporary forward positions. Posi-tion areas of medium artillery seldom exceed in depth thoseof the light artillery and usually overlap those of the latter,in which case the light artillery is given priority in thechoice of position. Heavy artillery, commensurate with itsmissions, is so located as to provide it the maximum pro-tection. Artillery may be posted in temporary positions asroving artillery for the purpose of firing certain required

142

Page 157: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 171

missions without disclosing the actual battery positions.When switch positions are prepared or contemplated, artil-lery positions for the support of the switch positions shouldbe selected.

h. Reinforcing artillery.-When reinforcing artillery is tobe provided, positions, communication, and other arrange-ments for its employment should be prepared by unitsalready in position.

i. Preparation to support either flank.-The scheme ofartillery employment must provide for the maximum flexi-bility. Careful planning is essential, to the end that themassing of artillery fire on and in front of any hostile threatcan be effected promptly. Frequently no decision can bemade in advance as to direction of the main enemy attack.The artillery, by advance selection of alternative observationto meet an attack from any direction, by laying essentialwire lines thereto, and by reconnaissance for suitable alter-native positions, prepares to render adequate support regard-less of direction of the enemy main attack. Pending definiteinformation regarding direction of the enemy main attack,particularly when wide envelopments or flanking attacks areprobable, part of the light artillery may be held in generalsupport or in readiness.

j. Defense against aircraft and ground troops.-(1) Thedefense against aircraft and ground troops by artillery inposition is covered in part one.

(2) When a strong hostile mechanized attack is pending,a few mobile batteries are prepared for prompt movementto any part of the position where hostile tanks may succeedin penetrating the position. These batteries may be used tosupplement the infantry antitank defense.

k. Use of chemicals.-Chemicals when authorized may usu-ally be employed without restriction, except that care mustbe taken that the effect does not extend within the defender'sposition. Except for close-support fires, persistent gas willusually be very effective, particularly in counterbattery andinterdiction. Smoke may be used in the defense during coun-terattacks and for neutralizing hostile artillery observation.

1. Defensive works.-In general, each combat arm is respon-sible for the execution of the work necessary to its own

143

Page 158: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

171-172 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

defense. Artillery does not permit this work to interferewith the execution of its fire missions. Artillery defensiveworks are developed progressively as opportunity permits andare executed primarily to increase the power of the artilleryto assist the supported troops. Accordingly, the greatest at-tention is given to developing and protecting the means ofobservation, command, and fire control. Protection for thefiring batteries is obtained chiefly through provision formobility in their employment, selection of alternative em-placements, defilade, camouflage, and adequate echelonmentin width and depth. Protection for personnel is obtained asexplained in part one, and in FM 6-130.

1* 72. EARLY RESUMPTION OF OFFENSIVE CONTEMPLATED.-a.

A commander with an offensive mission may decide to assumethe defensive because of temporary combat inferiority or inorder to create a situation which will place the enemy at atactical disadvantage and thus offer opportunity for a decisivecounteroffensive. In both cases, an early resumption of theoffensive is contemplated. By inducing the enemy to attackfirst, the commander hopes to fix and exhaust him and then,when the enemy is disorganized, to launch the counteroffen-sive. In such an operation, a large part of the infantrystrength is held out of action initially, prepared to strike theoffensive blow. The general mission of the artillery will indi-cate what part of the available artillery will be committed tothe defensive phase of the action, as well as where the artil-lery must be prepared to mass its fire or what priority ofsupport is desired during the defensive phase. In addition,if counteroffensive is to be assumed in a relatively short time,the artillery is instructed to make preparation for supportof the counteroffensive.

b. Usually the defending force is given the minimumartillery support essential to accomplishment of its mission;the force making the counteroffensive is given the maximumsupport practicable.

c. If the counteroffensive is to be launched at or shortlyafter daylight, and time and space factors and the terrain(road net and absence of defiles) permit, artillery employedinitially in support of the defensive phase will be able to dis-place under cover of darkness to new positions suitable for

144

Page 159: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 172-175

support of the counteroffensive. Since counteroffensive isthe decisive phase, the time required for such a displace-ment should be calculated with a considerable factor of safety,unless there is assurance that the enemy will not interferewith the movement.

d. Usually the exact location of the main and secondaryattacks of the counteroffensive cannot be determined at thebeginning of the defensive phase. Therefore, it is usuallyadvisable to place an initial restriction on the employmentof persistent chemicals. If the scheme of the counteroffensivehas been definitely predetermined, persistent chemicals maybe employed on any parts of the defensive front where nosubsequent interference to the friendly attack will be possible.

SECTION VI

RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

* 173. GENERAL.-A retrograde movement is any movementof a command to the rear, or away from the enemy. Such amovement may be classified further as a withdrawal fromaction (night or daylight), a delaying action, or a retirement.

* 174. EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY.-In retrograde movements,the principal mission of the artillery is to delay the enemyadvance and to assist the Infantry in disengaging from action.Just prior to disengagement, counterbattery becomes especiallyimportant. Close-in defensive fires usually are relativelyunimportant. Truck-drawn light and medium artillery isbest suited to support in retrograde movements, combiningthe required fire-power with high mobility. Positions areselected which afford the maximum ranges consistent withfacility of withdrawal by covered routes. Maximum use ismade of air observation.

* 175. WITHDRAWALS.-A withdrawal from action is the opera-tion of breaking off combat with a hostile force. It mayconstitute the initial phase of a retirement. It is habituallyemployed in the execution of a delaying action.

a. Night withdrawal.-In a night withdrawal, only weakoutpost elements, formed from troops nearest the enemy,are left in immediate contact with the hostile force.

145

Page 160: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

175 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(1) The bulk of the artillery normally is withdrawn shortlyafter dark, moving, as the situation dictates, to assemblypoints where march columns are to be formed or to the sup-port of a new position. The movement of this artillery maybe made simultaneously where roads are ample or by echelon,with priority to the heavier calibers, where the road net islimited. It habitually precedes the Infantry of the main bodyin the retrograde movement.

(2) A part of the artillery remains in position to supportthe elements still in contact. Ordinarily, only so much ar-tillery is left in position as is necessary to keep up the appear-ance of normal activity. Thus it is desirable that both lightand medium weapons remain and that they be distributedacross the entire front. This artillery takes over the moreimportant fire missions on the entire front; usually it is notattached to the outpost elements, since ordinarily no singlecommander therefor is designated. This artillery usuallywithdraws simultaneously, preceding the Infantry of the out-post, at an hour set by the force commander.

b. Daylight withdrawal.-(1) As a daylight withdrawal isan emergency measure often forced upon a commander with-out much warning, the maneuver must usually be hastilyplanned. The actual form of the withdrawal may be forcedupon the commander by hostile pressure. Local coveringforces are designated by local infantry commanders to assisttheir firing lines to break off the engagement. A generalcovering force with an appropriate amount of attached ar-tillery is designated by the force commander; the remainingartillery provides support of the main force while breakingoff the action and furnishes close support of local coveringforces.

(2) The amount of artillery attached to the general cover-ing force is affected by the seriousness of the situation and bythe support required by the main force. A battalion is desir-able, since it is the smallest unit suitably organized for effi-cient fire direction and for withdrawal by echelon, thus pro-viding continuous support.

(3) Employment of the artillery with the main force mayvary from a favorable situation in which the mass may bewithdrawn promptly under cover of the artillery attached

146

Page 161: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 175-176

to the covering force, to critical situations requiring all theartillery to fight in the disengaging action furnishing con-tinuous support by echelonment to the rear. Artillery indirect support remains in action to the last possible momentand does not hesitate to sacrifice itself if necessary. When-ever practicable, support of the main force is provided in thenormal manner without attachment, though in critical situ-ations it may be necessary to attach batteries to local coveringforces.

* 176. DELAYING ACTION.-a. A delaying action is an opera-tion designed to prevent the uninterrupted advance of theenemy by holding for a limited time either a single positionor successive positions. When the necessary amount of timehas been gained on any position, the force withdraws fromaction.

b. Artillery is particularly valuable owing to the long-rangedelay provided by its weapons. Positions are sought wellforward to effect this long-range action. Ordinarily, closesupport of the delaying position need not be provided for.

c. Defense of the position is begun by the artillery in gen-eral support which lays down interdiction fires on the routesof hostile approach and covers the withdrawal of the elementsof the outpost. As the enemy develops his columns prelim-inary to deployment for attack, the artillery in direct sup-port joins in the counterpreparation fires placed on the hostileassembly positions. From the beginning of the action, fireof the artillery is directed principally against hostile infantryand mechanized units.

d. When the delay is being executed in successive posi-tions, the major part of the artillery usually is placed wellforward behind the most advanced position occupied withthe remainder in rear of the next position, thus insuringcontinuity of support during withdrawal from the advancedposition. Movement of the artillery by echelon from supportof the advanced position provides further for continuoussupport, particularly of intermediate covering positions, be-tween the main delaying positions. Whenever practicable,most effective support is provided by holding the artilleryunder central control, which permits the massing of its fireat critical points. Decentralization may be necessary be-

147

Page 162: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

176-178 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

cause of such, contingencies as width of front, obstacles be-tween major elements of the command, or rapidity or uncer-tainty of the action. Adequate observation aviation for ad-justment of the long-range fires required in delaying actionis essential.

* 177. RETIREMENT.-a. A retirement is a retrograde move-ment by which a force seeks to gain freedom of action bymoving to the rear and interposing a covering force betweenitself and the enemy. A retirement is initiated, wheneverpracticable, by a night withdrawal; thereafter the principlesof employment of artillery with the covering force usuallyparallel those with rear guards and in delaying actions.

b. Disposition of the artillery with the main body dependsupon its probable employment during the retirement. Whenreads are limited, the artillery is moved to the rear promptly.In certain situations, units may be placed in position at ap-propriate localities en route to cover the retirement. If theenemy is aggressive and the movement is made under pres-sure, the mass of the artillery may be required to remain nearthe tail of the main body to reinforce the fires of the artillerywith the security detachment. When aggressive action bythe enemy is not contemplated, the mass of the artillery mayprecede the main body, taking advantage of its mobility torelieve congestion. As the distance from the enemy increases,the small columns of the main body are consolidated intolarger march columns constituted as combat teams.

11 178. ARTILLERY WITH A CoRPS.--a. A retirement of a corpsis ordinarily made under protection of the rear guards ofthe divisions. Usually the corps artillery is employed onlywhen a stand must be made.

b. During the initial phase of a withdrawal preceding aretirement, selected corps units, particularly the mediumhowitzers, may assist the divisions and participate in the de-ception regarding the appearance of the front. The needfor counterbattery and other support, especially during adaylight withdrawal with the force under heavy pressure,may require continuous action of the corps howitzers byechelonment to the rear. As far as practicable and when notclosely pressed, the corps units are moved promptly to clearthe routes for division elements.

148

Page 163: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 178-179

c. When retirement is made by stages, the corps artilleryis usually employed to support each stage position; otherwiseit is moved directly to positions to support the new defensiveposition.

d. During retirement, movement of the corps artillery isusually centralized under control of the corps artillery officer.If an uncertain situation exists on a division front or if corpsand division units are intermingled in the original positionprior to retirement, it may be advisable to attach appropriatecorps artillery units to divisions.

e. In delaying action in successive positions, the corps ar-tillery normally supports the main delaying positions.. Delayby long-range fire from positions well forward is important.The distribution of corps artillery units in support of theseveral delaying positions conforms in general to the dis-tribution of the troops of the command as a whole. Thecorps artillery usually is retained under centralized control.

SECTION VII

WITH CAVALRY

* 179. GENERAL.-a. The fundamentals of employment of ar-tillery with Infantry apply to artillery operating with Cav-alry. The actual support of Cavalry after it has dismountedfor action parallels the support of Infantry in similar opera-tions. However, owing to the mobility of Cavalry whenmounted and the consequent more rapid development of thephases of the engagement, artillery supporting Cavalry ismore often required to occupy positions in a minimum of time,the positions are miore often in the open, and the use of directlaying is often appropriate. The long, rapid marches madeby Cavalry call for excellent care and conditioning of theteams on the part of horse artillery.

b. Generally, combat does not permit centralized control ofthe artillery by higher commanders that may be found innormal infantry combat. The artillery direct-support mis-sions, instead of being decided upon by conference with thecommander of the supported unit, are frequently decided uponby the artillery battalion or battery commander from whathe sees on the battlefield.

149

Page 164: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

179-183 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

c. Situations calling for the attachment of battalions orsingle batteries to cavalry units are quite common. Whenoperating alone, the personnel of the battery detail shouldbe augmented as may be necessary by battalion personnel.

· 180. POSITIONS TO SUPPORT A MOUNTED ATTACK.-When amounted attack is to be made, the position of the guns shouldbe chosen with a view to obtaining the most effective fireon the enemy prior to the cavalry charge, and of coveringwith effective fire the area over which the charge is to bemade. The position chosen should permit the fire to bedelivered up to the moment of collision and should nothamper in any way the movement of friendly Cavalry. Forthis reason positions on one or both flanks from which firemay be delivered across the front of the element makingthe mounted attack are generally best., A position in rearof a mounted attack is generally faulty, as the advance ofthe friendly troops masks the fire of the guns too soon. Insome cases, effective support can be given the mounted attackfrom positions covered by the pivot of maneuver. In othercases, when the enemy is strong in Cavalry, the most effec-tive positions for support of a mounted attack may requirespecial protection by the Cavalry, such as locating the Cav-alry reserve near the position of the artillery or vice versa.

* 181. ARTILLERY WITH CAVALRY RECONNAISSANCE DETACH-MENTS.-Artillery, varying in strength from a section to abattery, may be attached to a reconnaissance detachmentwhen the mission of the detachment warrants; in general,however, the mass of the artillery should be with the mainbody. To provide for artillery fire on enemy columns orother appropriate targets, artillery liaison officers or forwardobservers with facilities to communicate with the artillery byradio should accompany cavalry reconnaissance details.

· 182. ARTILLERY WITH CAVALRY ON COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE.-Usually the bulk of the artillery is held in readiness preparedto move with the main body to resist hostile efforts topenetrate the screen.

* 183. ARTILLERY WITH MECHANIZED CAVALRY.-The generalmethod of employment of artillery with mechanized Cavalryis essentially the same as the method of employment of

150

Page 165: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 183-184

artillery operating with horse Cavalry. The operations ofmechanized Cavalry will normally be conducted with greatrapidity and each operation will be of relatively short dura-tion. The artillery supporting mechanized Cavalry will havelittle time for detailed reconnaissance and preliminary prep-aration of plans.

a. On the march.-On the march, the artillery marchesnear the head of the main body to facilitate its early entryinto action. Reconnaissance detachments march with theforward elements of the advance guard. Artillery liaisonofficers or forward observers accompany the advanced scoutcar elements in order to provide means of bringing downartillery fire on enemy columns or other appropriate targetswhich may be encountered.

b. In the attack.-For an attack, the artillery is placedearly in positions from which it can cover the developmentand support the attack. The positions should be as farforward as safety from direct fire of hostile small armspermits, and such that direct laying may readily be employedin the close support of the attack. The principal fire mis-sions are fire on antitank weapons, counterbattery, andinterdiction.

c. In defense, delaying actions, and special operations.-The artillery operating with mechanized Cavalry is employedsimilarly to that supporting horse Cavalry in such opera-tions.

SECTION VIII

IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS

* 184. GENERAL.-Special operations are those where theterrain, weather, or nature of the operation itself have suchan influence as to necessitate special measures to meet thesituations which may arise. Special operations include nightoperations, raids, river crossings, defense of a river line,landing operations, defense of a coast line, and mountainand jungle warfare. The discussion in this section is limitedto land operations. Landing operations and the defense ofa coast line involve the joint action of the Army and theNavy; they are governed by special regulations.

151

Page 166: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

:L185-187 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 185. NIGHT ATTACKS.-a. The artillery to support theattack must complete the necessary survey, locate its objec-tives, and arrange for liaison before dark. All plans andarrangements must be simple and well coordinated. Sup-porting fire consists mainly of concentrations fired on atime schedule or on prearranged signals.

b. The artillery should concentrate upon disrupting thesystem of final protective fires of enemy machine guns andupon counterbattery of the enemy batteries which are firingbarrage and similar missions. In general, an artillery prep-aration is inadvisable; if fired, it should be short and violent.Fires are planned to box off the zone of attack and to protectthe Infantry upon its arrival at the objectives or in caseof a repulse.

* 186. RAIDs.-Artillery support during a raid consists ofneutralizing known and suspected hostile defense elementsof the position to be raided and of isolating the area bymeans of a box barrage (par. 128c). The attacking troopsare normally preceded by a rolling barrage, the artillery soemployed being used later to interdict approaches to thearea, to reinforce the fire isolating the area, or to neutralizeenemy defense elements capable of rendering support to theraided position. Counterbattery fire should be employed asnecessary during both the advance and withdrawal ofattacking troops. In the withdrawal, a standing barragemay be employed and smoke may be used for screening.

* 187. RIVER CROSSINGS.-a. During the first phase of acrossing, the artillery assists in driving all hostile forcesacross the river, such action being in the nature of anadvance guard action; however, long-range artillery shouldbe employed relatively early to counterbattery enemy artilleryinterdicting avenues of approach.

b. Selection of a place where the river makes a salienttoward the attacking force enables the artillery to rendermore efficient support to the troops making the initial cross-ing. The artillery is placed in positions as close to the riverline as practicable.

c. Greatest secrecy should be preserved in the preparationsfor a crossing, movements generally being made under cover

152

Page 167: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 187-188

of darkness. When the element of surprise is not an essen-tial factor, the commander of the force may require theartillery to fire a preparation during the operations prepara-tory to crossing. If the movement is to be a complete sur-prise, the opening of fire should be delayed until after thefirst waves have crossed.

d. Supporting fire of the artillery normally consists of con-centrations during the initial stages of the landing on thehostile bank. These concentrations are placed on pointsfrom which the enemy can fire on or observe the crossing.A rolling barrage or more generally concentrations precedethe advance to secure the bridgehead. Employment of ar-tillery fire in the maintenance of the bridgehead is similarto its employment in a defensive position. The artillery ingeneral support interdicts the movement of hostile reservesand protects the flanks of the bridgehead. As soon as thehostile artillery is located, the corps artillery neutralizes it.

e. Elements of the artillery may be ferried across rela-tively early to assist in extending the bridgehead; such unitsare usually attached to assault units. The mass of the ar-tillery should be crossed on bridges, the crossing being bysuccessive echelons as in a forward displacement during anattack. In certain situations, smoke may be used to ad-vantage to cover the preparatory operations and the crossing.Artillery may be employed in feints to deceive the enemy asto the actual point of crossing.

f. As soon as the Infantry after crossing has capturedsuitable terrain for artillery observation, signal communica-tion should be established between advanced observationposts and the firing batteries which have not crossed. Radioand visual signals should be used until wire communicationis established.

* 188. DEFENSE OF A RIVER LINE.--a. A river line may beemployed as an obstacle in front of a defensive or delayingposition or as an aid to counteroffensive action which seeksto strike the enemy while his forces are astride the river.

b. When the river line is employed as an obstacle in frontof a defensive position, the main line of resistance is placedon or near the river bank. The artillery is employed as inthe defense of a position (par. 171g), except that it will be

153

Page 168: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

188 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

usual to emplace initially only a part of the artillery to coverthe most likely crossing places, probable assembly positionsand avenues of approach, and to hold the remainder in readi-ness to support the defense when the main crossing isdiscovered.

c. When the river line is to be held as a delaying positionin a retrograde movement, the employment of the artilleryis covered in paragraph 176.

d. (1) When the river line is employed as an aid to counter-offensive action to strike the enemy while his forces areastride the river, the river line is held by relatively weakinfantry outpost detachments; the bulk of the Infantry isheld in reserve prepared to strike the offensive blow as soonas the main hostile crossing is recognized. Some artilleryis attached to the outpost detachments; the mass of theartillery is held in readiness, prepared to support thecounteroffensive.

(2) The artillery attached to the advanced detachmentsis employed as in the support of an outpost (par. 159).Platoons or batteries are emplaced in concealed positionsto cover the probable points of crossing and the approachesthereto; they remain silent until suitable targets presentthemselves and then open a surprise fire.

(3) Plans for entry into action of the remainder of theartillery are prepared in connection with the plans for theintervention of the main force. These plans usually covertwo phases; support of the advanced detachments wherea hostile crossing is being effected in order to delay thecrossing of the hostile troops and prevent them from estab-lishing a bridgehead, and support of the main force in itscounterattack to eject the enemy or limit the extension ofhis bridgehead. In the first phase, the artillery occupiespositions from which it can concentrate against the hostilepoints of crossing, particularly bridges under construction,and can cover the hostile approaches to the river. Thesepositions are occupied as soon as definite information isavailable concerning the enemy's intentions. In the secondphase, the artillery is employed as in the support of acounterattack. Since the mass of the hostile artillery will

154

Page 169: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 188-191

still be on the far side of the river, the neutralization ofhostile observation is especially important.

(4) Artillery observation posts covering the probablepoints of crossing must be established and organized inadvance and included in the artillery communication net.A liaison detachment should be sent to the commander ofeach outpost sector.

* 189. MOUNTAIN AND JUNGLE WARFARE.-a. Employment ofartillery in mountain and jungle warfare corresponds to thatin other types of operations, with the necessary modifica-tions incident to the terrain. In this type of warfare, theprincipal difficulties in employment of artillery are-

(1) Compulsory decentralization of control, often neces-sitating the splitting up of batteries and the attachment ofelements as accompanying artillery.

(2) Scarcity of positions and adequate observation anddifficulty of locating suitable routes, necessitating more ex-tensive reconnaissance.

b. In forces operating in such terrain, it is desirable that aportion of the artillery consist of pack units for operating offthe main route; other artillery, so far as practicable, shouldbe capable of high-angle fire.

SECTION IX

ESTIMATE OF ARTILLERY REQUIREMENTS

* 190. RESPONSIBILITY.-The task of estimating the amountof artillery needed to insure adequate support is a responsi-bility of the artillery officer of the army, independent corps,or independent division. In the case of the army or inde-pendent corps, the lower echelons of command ordinarilywill be called upon to prepare detailed studies of the re-quirements for their respective zones of action and thefinal estimate of the army or corps artillery officer will bebased on a consideration of these studies and the plans ofthe army or corps as a whole.

* 191. FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED.-a. The desirable amountsand types of artillery for any operation are determined pri-marily by the fire missions contemplated. The basic factors

155

Page 170: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

191 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

to be considered are the number, types, and ranges of theobjectives to be attacked, character of fire to be employed,and time available for the delivery of the fire. These factorsfrequently cannot be determined with accuracy. In estimat-ing them, it is necessary to consider the character of theterrain; strength and disposition of the enemy; amount ofcounterbattery and distant interdiction to be undertaken; andin the offensive, front and depth of the main and holdingattacks and extent to which combat aviation and tanks areto be employed. A sufficient number of positions must beavailable for emplacing the batteries without overcrowdingor excessive dispersion in depth; the number of roads avail-able and the road space alloted for the movement of artilleryand ammunition must be adequate for the completion of themovement in the time allowed.

b. For a defensive action and for the initial stage of anattack in a situation in which sufficient information of theenemy position is available, the requirements can be deter-mined with considerable accuracy by listing the barrages,concentrations, interdictions, and other known fires required.Estimates for later phases can be based only on the mostprobable eventualities. However, requirements for the initialphase of an attack usually are the most severe.

c. For an offensive operation, a study of experience datadetermined from past operations of a similar nature willfurnish the basis for a rough estimate of the artillery require-ments.

(1) For an attack against an organized position, the bestavailable data, based on experience, are contained in thefollowing table:

Batteries per 1,000 yards of front

Requirement RR or otherLight Medium or Total long range

Ligh heavY18 I 36 artillery

Maximum - -- - 18 18 36 1.5Normal - -14 13 27 1Minimum -- -- ---.--- 10 10 20

156

Page 171: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 191

The maximum allotment is for a situation in which the enemyis on the alert, expecting an attack, and is thoroughly organ-ized, supplied, and equipped. The normal requirement is fora situation in which the enemy is more or less surprised, hasnot been reinforced, and is only fairly well organized, sup-plied, and equipped. The minimum allotment is for a situa-tion in which the enemy falls back during the preliminariesof an attack, occupies a poorly organized position, or is ex-pected to fall back on account of pressure elsewhere; itusually is applied to the front of the holding attack.

(2) In open warfare, owing to the rapidly changing situa-tion and lack of detailed information, many of the basicfactors cannot be determined accurately. The followingfigures may be used as a guide in lieu of data based on actualexperience:

Batteries per 1,000 yards of front

Allotment MediumLight or Total Long range

heavy

Main attack ................. 5 4 9Holding attack ...- . ...........3 3 6

238273 -40-11 157

Page 172: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 6

PLANS AND ORDERS

* 192. GENERAL.-Combat orders are also covered in FM101-5. Regardless of the size of the force, the basic decisionregarding employment of the artillery rests with the forcecommander and his plan will include instructions for theartillery. These instructions will often be limited to a broadgeneral mission, indicating only the area in which the ar-tillery will be prepared to mass its fire or the front to begiven the preponderance of artillery support. It is customaryfor the force commander, before announcing his plan, toavail himself of his artillery officer's opinion relative to em-ployment of the artillery.

* 193. DIRECTIVE.-Using as a basis the plan of the forcecommander, the artillery officer adds necessary basic decisionsto prepare a tentative plan for employment of the artillery.He issues this plan to his staff in the form of a directive.

· 194. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT OF FIELD ARTIL-LERY.-Using the directive of the artillery officer as a guide,the artillery staff prepares the detailed recommendations foremployment of the Field Artillery. These detailed recom-mendations are submitted to the force commander or hischief staff officer for approval. When approved, they formthe artillery subparagraph of the force commander's fieldorder and are the basis for the detailed plan for the employ-ment of the artillery and the artillery field order for theoperation.

* 195. FIELD ARTILLERY PLANS.-a. Detailed plan.-The FieldArtillery has no independent role in battle; the plan for itsemployment is built entirely with the idea of assisting to theutmost the scheme of maneuver of the force commander.This artillery plan, with large commands, may be completeand detailed and will be published in a written field order oran artillery annex. With small commands or in rapidlychanging situations, the artillery plan will normally be brief,

158

Page 173: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 195

omitting many details found in a complete field order orannex, and may be issued orally. In either case, the sequenceof steps in arriving at the detailed plan for employment of theField Artillery with the force is essentially the same, varyingin details with the size of the command and the tactical situ-ation. This sequence may be summarized as follows:

(1) Consultation by the force commander with the artil-lery officer.

(2) Announcement by the force commander of his plan,including his general instructions for employment of the FieldArtillery to further same.

(3) Estimation of the artillery situation and formulationof the tentative plan for employing the artillery, consistingof the artillery instructions of the force commander supple-mented by such basic artillery decisions as are necessary.

(4) Issuance of the tentative plan of the artillery officer tohis staff in the form of a directive.

(5) Preparation by the artillery staff of the recommenda-tions for employment of the Field Artillery, usually in suchform that they can be used in operation orders.

(6) Approval by the force commander or his representativeof the recommendations described in (5) above.

(7) Preparation by the artillery staff of the detailed planfor employment of the Field Artillery.

(8) Publication of the detailed plan in the form' of a fieldorder or field artillery annex.

b. Plans of subordinate artillery commanders.-A com-mander of a subordinate artillery unit receives his missionfrom the next higher commander. This mission is the basisof his plan. However, the details of his plan will be largelyinfluenced by the plan of the supported-unit (infantry,cavalry, or other artillery) commander. Consultation withthe latter is essential before the subordinate commander canperfect his plan. The sequence of steps taken by a subordi-nate artillery commander in arriving at his detailed planmay be summarized as follows:

(1) Consideration of his mission as assigned by his imme-diate superior.

(2) Consultation with the supported-unit commander, toobtain from the latter his scheme of maneuver and the ar-tillery fires desired.

159

Page 174: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

195-196 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(3) Estimation of the artillery situation and formulationof his plan, based on his mission and the desires of thesupported-unit commander. In formulating details of theplan, the commander receives such assistance from his staffas he deems necessary.

(4) Publication of the detailed plan in the form of a fieldorder.

c. Progressive issuance of orders.-The inference should notbe drawn that the procedure outlined in a and b above mustbe completed before any orders are issued. On the contrary,as soon as parts of the plan are formulated and coordinated,the necessary fragmentary orders based on them should beissued without delay.

* 196. ORDERS AND ANNEXES.---. Artillery field orders.-(1)Forms and check lists for artillery field orders are given inFM 6-130 and FM 101-5.

(2) Field artillery combat orders follow the five-paragraphform for field orders and may be oral, dictated, or written.Written orders are issued by brigades and regiments whenthe tactical situation is such that it is practicable to publishan order and get it to the troops in time for their action;otherwise, dictated or oral orders are issued. Battalion andbattery orders are almost always oral. Often, because oflack of time, artillery field orders are issued in fragmentaryform; this is usually the case with battalion orders and fre-quently with regimental orders, When written fragmentaryorders are issued, each order should be given an appropriateheading indicating its main purpose, such as reconnaissance,fire missions, displacements. The sequence should followthat of a field order, and in units larger than the battalion,the fragmentary orders may be combined later into a com-plete written field order. In preparing artillery field orders,use is made of explanatory maps, tracings, charts, and tables,which are referred to in the order and appended thereto asannexes.

(3) The army (corps) artillery officer rarely issues an ar-tillery field order. Normally the artillery annex to the army(corps) field order is sufficient for the purposes of the com-manders of the major units of the army (corps) artillery,provided they receive a copy of the army (corps) field order.

160

Page 175: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 196

The annex alone is not sufficient, since the commanders ofthe major units must have the information contained inparagraphs 1, 2, 3, and sometimes 4 and 5, of the army (corps)order.

(4) The field order of the division artillery is based onthe division commander's plan of employment of his artilleryas expressed in the division field order and includes suchinstructions as are necessary to insure coordination betweenunits of the division artillery and also between the divisionartillery and that of the corps and army, based upon theartillery annex to the corps order.

(5) Regimental field orders are based on the mission as-signed by the next higher commander. The commander of aregiment in direct support, prior to issuing his order, con-sults with the commander of the unit which the regimentsupports. Paragraph 4 contains items concerning supply,evacuation, and circulation essential for the information ofbattalion commanders.

(6) Battalion field orders seldom are issued to all thebattery commanders and staff officers at the same time.The battalion usually is the only organization to announcea reference point at the beginning of an oral order (fororienting purposes) or in paragraph 2 of a written order.Instructions covering the fire direction plan (FM 6-40) areincluded in paragraph 3. Paragraph 4 contains appropriatedata concerning the ammunition train, ammunition supply,aid station, and other appropriate administrative matters.The battalion axis of signal communication is generallygiven only to the communication officer, and no battery axesof signal communication are given.

(7) Battery field orders are usually given in fragmentaryform to the individuals concerned.

(8) Warning orders are of particular importance to artil-lery units, since the efficiency of artillery movements and firedepends on timely preparation.

b. Artillery subparagraph of division (corps, army) fieldorder.-This subparagraph includes basic decisions regardingemployment of the artillery sufficient for the artillery com-mander to formulate his detailed plans and for other majorcommanders to understand what support they may expect

161

Page 176: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

:196 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

from the artillery. The artillery officer in his capacity asstaff officer usually recommends the content of the artillerysubparagraph. Whether or not the artillery subparagraphshould be amplified by an artillery annex to the field orderdepends upon the complexity of the plan and the degree ofcentralized control of artillery fires. For a form for theartillery subparagraph, see FM 6-130.

c. Artillery annexes.-Forms for artillery annexes aregiven in FM 6-130. An artillery annex to the field order ofa command is an amplification of the artillery subparagraphof the field order. The artillery annex is issued whenever,by reason of the amount of detail relative to the employmentof the artillery, the field order of a command would be un-duly expanded by including these details in the artillerysubparagraph. The written annex follows in general thefield order form, except that when the artillery commander'sfield order is taken in its entirety to form the artillery annex,the field order form is modified by omitting subject matterwhich would be a duplication of matter contained in thefield order to which the annex is attached. The artilleryannex is given a caption as follows:

ANNEX - TO FO - , - DIVISION (CORPS)(ARMY) FIELD ARTILLERY

Many of the details of an annex are set forth in maps,charts, tables, or tracings, which are attached as annexes tothe annex and are numbered serially. Each shows by legendthe particular purpose for which intended; for example,Annex 1-Artillery Preparation or Annex 2-AccompanyingFires. An annex may consist exclusively of maps, charts,tables, or overlays.

(1) Division.-In the division, an artillery annex isappropriate where the scheme of artillery fires has beenhighly organized and control is centralized. When an artil-lery annex is used, the division artillery commander's fieldorder is usually taken in its entirety, the annex captionbeing added thereto. After authentication by the divisionG-3, the annex is attached to the division field order. Thedivision artillery commander's field order is issued as an

162

Page 177: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 196

annex to the division field order when it is necessary togive the other troops more complete information of theartillery than can be included in the artillery subparagraphof the division field order without. making it undulyvoluminous.

(2) Corps and army.-Usually the corps and the armyissue artillery annexes. The artillery annex to the corps(army) field order is prepared by the corps (army) artil-lery officer; it publishes to subordinate commanders thecorps (army) commander's orders for the employment of allthe artillery with the unit. The artillery annex to thecorps field order may contain-certain instructions for thedivision artillery, and similarly the artillery annex to thearmy field order may contain certain instructions for theemployment of both corps and division artillery. Such in-structions are confined to the assignment of specific firemissions of importance from the corps (army) viewpoint, orto general instructions, as to the methods of employmentnecessary for the coordination of all artillery units to beemployed. In an annex, appropriate subheads, such asDivision artillery, Corps artillery, and Army artillery, in thesequence given, are used. The annex is signed by the chiefof staff in the name of the commander and authenticated bythe corps (army) 0-3.

163

Page 178: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,
Page 179: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

PART FOUR

LOGISTICS

(This part deals primarily with those details of logistics which haveparticular application to the Feld Artillery. The entire subject iscovered in FM 100-10, FM 101-5, and FM 101-10.)

CHAPTER 1

SUPPLY OTHER THAN AMMUNITION IN ARTILLERYUNITS

U 197. TABLES OF SUPPLY AND EQUIPMENT.-Supply publica-tions of the various services list the component parts, spareparts, and accessories pertaining to the weapons and trans-portation listed in Tables of Organization and Tables ofBasic Allowances.

a. Tables of Basic Allowances.-These tables prescribe indetail the authorized allowances of organizational and in-dividual equipment with the exception of equipment requiredfor temporary use for special purposes; component parts,spare parts, accessories, and expendable items listed in pub-lications of supply services; recruit clothing and equipmentand Alaskan clothing prescribed in AR 600-750 and AR 615-40.

b. Tables of Organization.-These tables prescribe in tabu-lar form the organic structure of units, including subdivi-sions and personnel with qualifications thereof. They alsoshow for purposes of information the authorized allowances,as prescribed in Tables of Basic Allowances, of weapons,transportation, and principal items of equipment pertainingto the unit.

* 198. TRAINS.-The maintenance sections of all batteriescarry water, small spare parts, and the unconsumed portionof the ration. The ammunition train of each battaliontransports extra ammunition for all guns in the battalion.

* 199. ARTILLERY OFFICERS WITH SUPPLY FUNCTIONS.--a.

Brigade, regiment, and battalion S-4's.-See chapter 2, partthree.

165

Page 180: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

199-201 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

b. Battery.-In the routine of battery supply, the batterycommander is assisted by the supply sergeant, mess sergeant,and stable or motor sergeant. (See par. 203.)* 200. BRIGADE.-a. Brigade or division artillery.-(1) Gen-eral.-With the exception of ammunition supply, the supplyactivities of the staff of the division artillery commander areconfined to insuring that the tactical efficiency of units doesnot suffer through lack of supplies. The division artillerycommander keeps himself informed as to the supply statusof his regiments and other units and takes appropriate stepsto remedy any supply situation causing difficulties. The ad-ministrative plans of the force commander are included inhis administrative order which is furnished the division ar-tillery commander; copies are furnished each regiment andto other units as appropriate. The division may deal withthe division artillery as an entity in the matter of trains,train bivouacs, and the issue of rations and forage.

(2) Brigade headquarters and headquarters battery.-Sup-plies for this battery are obtained from the division by thebattery commander in the same manner as regiments procuretheir supplies. On the march, those elements of this batterycorresponding to a maintenance section may follow the bat-tery or may be directed to join a battalion ammunition trainof one of the regiments; in bivouac, it usually is located nearthe brigade command post.

b. Brigade (corps and army).-(1) Corps artillery bri-gade.-The supply system in the corps artillery brigade issimilar to that in the division artillery, except that requestsfor supplies go to appropriate corps supply officers and sup-plies are furnished by appropriate corps trains.

(2) Army artillery.-Army artillery units are supplied in amanner similar to that of the corps artillery brigade, exceptthat requests for supplies go to appropriate army supplyofficers and supplies are furnished by army supply estab-lishments.

c. GHQ reserve artillery.--GHQ reserve artillery is suppliedin the same manner as the organic artillery of the unit towhich attached.[ 201. REGIMENT.---a. Fundamentals of supply.-(1) For allsupplies (except ammunition when the artillery is organized

166

Page 181: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 201

as a brigade), the regiment deals directly with the division(corps or army).

(2) The regiment is the supply unit for its components, in-cluding attached units; it is the last of the major links inthe chain of supply other than ammunition.

(3) Supply is based on the need of the troops; routinesupplies are furnished without requisition, other supplies onany intelligible form of request.

b. Supply and maintenance platoon.-Each regimentalheadquarters battery has a supply and maintenance platoon.This platoon contains the personnel necessary to assist theregimental supply officer in the exercise of his supply duties.It also contains personnel and equipment to perform thenecessary regimental motor maintenance functions. When abattalion is detached from the regiment, a suitable propor-tion of the supply and maintenance platoon will accompanyit to perform the supply and maintenance functions.

c. Administrative plans and orders.-The plans preparedby S-4 depend upon the operation plan of the regiment andthe administrative plans of higher authority. S-4 keeps in-formed as to the operation plan of the regiment throughcontact with the commander and other staff officers; and asto administrative plans of higher authorities through theiradministrative orders and instructions. Administrative or-ders contain information relative to distribution of rationsand forage; supply points for ammunition, gasoline and oil,water, and the various essential supplies as appropriate;collecting and hospital stations for men and collecting sta-tions for animals; instructions regarding burial, salvage,captured material, and prisoners of war; circulation andcontrol of traffic; instructions for quartering parties; andlocations of the rear echelon and the forward echelon ofthe headquarters issuing the order. Regiments do not pub-lish administrative orders. Such items as may concern theseveral subordinate units of the regiment are included inparagraph 4 of the regimental field order. The necessaryinformation and instructions to be given by S-4 of theregiment usually are communicated orally or by short writ-ten messages to the officers concerned.

167

Page 182: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

201-202 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

d. Procurement and delivery of supplies.-(1) Rations andforage for the regiment are based on the consolidatedstrength report of the regiment made up by S-1 and trans-mitted to the division adjutant (corps, army). Each bat-tery submits to regimental headquarters a daily strengthreport (morning report) of men and animals. This reportmay be sent by telephone. When supplies other than ra-tions and forage (except ammunition, gasoline and oil, andmedical supplies) are needed, the unit commander sends arequest for them to the regimental S-4 who consolidates therequisitions of the several units and transmits the consoli-dated requisition to the appropriate division (corps or army)supply officer.

(2) Rations and forage supplies may be distributed at therailheads to regimental transportation (railhead distribution)or may be distributed to regimental areas by cargo vehiclesunder supervision of the quartermaster (unit distribution).Other classes of supplies may be distributed by cargo ve-hicles under supervision of the responsible supply officer,may be delivered at the railhead, or may be made availableat depots.

* 202. BATTALION.-a. General.-Unless the battalion is de-tached from the regiment, it has no supply functions otherthan ammunition supply, except to insure that the tacticalefficiency of the batteries does not suffer through lack ofsupplies. The battalion commander keeps himself informedas to the supply status of the units of his command, takingappropriate steps to correct deficiencies. When the battalionis detached from the regiment, it takes over the supply func-tions of the regiment with respect to the components of thebattalion; it is accompanied by personnel from the regi-mental supply and maintenance platoon as prescribed inTables of Organization.

b. Rations, forage, gasoline, and oil.-The status of therations carried on a kitchen depends on the number ofmeals which have been served; that is, on the time of dayand when the last rations were delivered to the kitchen.The same is true for the grain ration for each animal; like-wise, the amount of gasoline and oil varies between deliv-

168

Page 183: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 202-203

eries. The C or D type field ration carried by individuals isto be used only in an emergency.

* 203. MAINTENANCE SECTION OF BATTERY.-The maintenancesection is the supply and maintenance agency of the battery.

a. Duties of personnel.-The following are the principalduties of members of the maintenance section who havesupply and allied functions:

(1) Mess sergeant.-The mess sergeant, under supervisionof the lieutenant in charge, is responsible for drawing and pre-paring the daily ration, for good order and police of thekitchen and mess area, for discipline and training of the cooks,and for care and maintenance of property connected with hisactivities. He is assisted by the cooks and by such kitchenpolice as are made available.

(2) Stable sergeant (animal-drawn units).--The stablesergeant, under supervision of the lieutenant in charge, isresponsible for the care of all public animals assigned tothe battery. He is responsible for care and issue of all foragein the battery, for care of sick animals, for good order andpolice of the stables and picket lines, and for care and mainte-nance of the property connected with his activities. He super-vises the work of the horseshoers and the saddler. He isassisted by the stable orderly and such stable police as aremade available.

(3) Motor sergeant (motorized units).-The motor ser-geant, under the supervision of the motor officer, and assistedby his motor mechanics, is responsible for the care andmaintenance of motor equipment of the battery.

(4) Supply sergeant.-The supply sergeant, under super-vision of the lieutenant in charge, is responsible for the gen-eral care of all Government property issued to the batteryuntil it has been issued by him. In addition, he keeps thesupply records of the battery and initiates requests for newsupplies. He supervises the work of the chief mechanic andgeneral mechanics in repairing and maintaining the mat6rielof the battery.

b. Disposition.-(1) On the march.-In truck-drawn bat-teries, the maintenance section habitually accompanies thebattery. In horse-drawn batteries, that part of the section

169

Page 184: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

203 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

transported by motor accompanies the battalion ammunitiontrain.

(2) When combat becomes imminent.-In truck-drawn bat-teries, maintenance sections (less mechanics' trucks) may bedirected to join the battalion ammunition train, may be as-sembled at some convenient point, usually under an officerdesignated by the battalion commander, or may remain withthe batteries. In horse-drawn batteries, the motorized por-tions of the maintenance sections may remain with the bat-talion ammunition train or may be assembled as the battalioncommander directs.

(3) When battery positions are occupied.-Battery mainte-nance sections (less elements needed with the batteries) maybe retained under battalion control in a battalion rear eche-lon, to which may be sent the limbers (motors) of the gunbatteries. If the situation permits, the battalion commandermay release to their batteries these maintenance sections.

c. Positions.-In action, the maintenance section should belocated in a concealed position as near the battery as thesituation permits, in order to facilitate control, carrying outof motor maintenance, and prompt feeding of men and ani-mals. The position should not be so near to that of thebattery as to subject the section to fire directed at the firingbattery or to indicate to the enemy the location of a firingbattery. The element of the battalion headquarters batterycharged with maintenance and supply duties bivouacs nearthe command post. The maintenance section of a battalionammunition train bivouacs with the train.

170

Page 185: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 2

ARTILLERY AMMUNITION SUPPLY

U 204. GENERAL.-The general fundamentals of supply areapplicable to ammunition supply. The following additionalpoints are especially applicable:

a. Resupply of ammunition should be by established credits.b. The routine daily ammunition reports (FM 6-130), com-

bined with estimates based on plans for future operations,form the basis on which ammunition is supplied.

c. Ammunition must be delivered to the firing batteries incomplete rounds (projectile and fuze, powder charge, andprimer); the amounts delivered should be sufficient to permitthe batteries to fire until their first displacement and thento move fully loaded. Care must be exercised to avoid de-livering excessive amounts of ammunition to battery posi-tions, resulting in a surplus, which in the event of adisplacement would have to be abandoned or rehandled.

d. Ammunition resupply should be so arranged that all am-munition vehicles, when displacing, will have their normalloads intact.

e. Every attempt must be made by commanders to avoidabandoning ammunition when their units change position.

f. Continual care must be exercised to protect ammunitionfrom the action of the weather. (FM 6-40 and FM 6-120.)

* 205. ARTILLERY OFFICERS.-A primary duty of all artilleryofficers and artillery commanders is close supervision of am-munition supply and expenditure. This supervision includespreparation of estimates of ammunition requirements, allo-cation of available ammunition, preparation of ammunitionreports, and preparation of appropriate parts of administra-tive orders. Shipment of artillery ammunition to supplypoints, in quantities in accordance with the prepared esti-mates of requirements, is handled by the supply services;normally the supply forward of ammunition depots and rail-heads is the duty of the artillery itself, assistance when nec-essary being furnished by higher echelons. Considerations of

171

Page 186: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

205-208 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

procurement and transportation require that expenditure becontrolled; this control is a responsibility of army, corps, anddivision artillery officers who must weigh proposed expendi-tures against expected results when preparing their ammuni-t;ion plans for any particular operation.

* 206. MUNITIONS OFFICERS (ch. 2, pt. three).-Munitions of-ficers are employed upon staff duties pertaining to ammuni-tion supply as directed by their commanding officers. Specificduties vary, depending upon the responsibility of the com-mander concerned. The following duties apply in general toall munitions officers:

a. Receiving and consolidating ammunition reports andpreparing reports with respect thereto; forwarding the latterto the next higher authority in the chain of ammunitionsupply.

b. Keeping their commanders informed of the amounts,kinds, and calibers of ammunition on hand by organization;and of the condition and suitability thereof.

c. Submitting recommendations regarding plans for thedrawing and delivery of ammunition, location and operationof trains, traffic circulation, location of dumps and distribut-ing points if used, and amounts and kinds of ammunition atdistributing points, dumps, and battery positions.

d. Preparing for approval pertinent parts of orders andother instructions regarding ammunition supply.

* 207. TRAIN COMMANDERS.-Commanders of all units chargedwith the transport of ammunition are responsible to theirrespective commanding officers for the efficiency of ammuni-tion transport; for drawing and delivery of ammunition inthe prescribed amounts, calibers, kinds, component parts, andlots; and for concealment and camouflage of their ammuni-tion dumps, distributing points, loads, and bivouacs.

* 208. CHAIN OF AMMUNITION SUPPLY.-Ammunition allottedto an army, .usually by establishing a credit in communica-tions zone depots, is used to stock army ammunition depots(or railheads). The army commander, on recommendationof the army artillery officer allocates this ammunition to thearmy artillery and to each corps and separate division. Simi-larly, the corps commander reallocates the corps allowance

172

Page 187: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 208-209

to the corps artillery and to each division. Likewise, in thedivision artillery the ammunition may be reallocated to regi-ments to cover a particular operation or period of time. Ineach case, the subordinate unit is informed of the supplypoints at which the various types of ammunition are availableand the hours during which it may be drawn.

U 209. SUPPLY ESTABLISHMENTS.-For further details regard-ing ammunition supply installations, see Ordnance TechnicalManuals.

a. Ammunition supply point.-This is a generic term appliedto ammunition depots, railheads, and distributing points.Ammunition supply points are designated by combining thename of the establishing unit with the type of installation;for example, "First Army Ammunition Depot No. 1", "lstDivision Ammunition Railhead", "2d Division AmmunitionDistributing Point." The unit ordnance service is responsiblefor the organization and operation of ammunition supplypoints of divisions and larger units.

(1) Ammunition depot and railhead.-An ammunitiondepot is an organized locality for the reception, classification,storage, and issue of ammunition. The unit ordnance serv-ice is charged with the organization and operation of ammu-nition depots of the unit. An ammunition railhead is alocation on a rail line where ammunition is received by railand issued to unit trains direct from cars or from the groundadjacent to the: rail line with a minimum of unloading andsorting prior to issue. Ammunition railheads are ordnanceservice installations. Desirable characteristics of a site foran ammunition depot or railhead are-

(a) On or adjacent to a railway with a sufficient sidingcapacity to accommodate the number of railway cars it maybe necessary to bring in at one time. A siding capacity forat least one train of 33 cars is usually the minimum.

(b) Beyond the range of hostile artillery fire. This maynot be practicable in the event the enemy has long rangerailway artillery.

(c) On the best available road net with good motor roadsleading into the division areas.

(d) Adequate traffic circulation facilities.

238273--40--12 173

Page 188: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

209 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(e) Separated from other installations by at least 500yards and from medical installations by 1,000 yards.

(/) Within an area protected from mechanized attacks.(2) Ammunition distributing point.-A unit supply installa-

tion in advance of depots and railheads where ammunition isissued to subordinate units. An ammunition distributingpoint should be-

(a) Readily accessible to the trains of the artillery it serves.(b) Off main traffic routes where practicable, and on good

motor roads from the rear. It should have a turn-aroundand should connect with other roads leading to batterypositions.

(c) Concealed from hostile air and ground observation.(d) Beyond the range of hostile medium artillery.(e) Located with sufficient space available so that oper-

ation at the distributing point will not block traffic.b. Ammunition dump.-An ammunition dump is a tempo-

rary stockage of ammunition on the ground within the areaof a unit. The commander of a unit establishing a clump isresponsible for the ammunition stored in the dump. Thedump is designated by the name of the establishing unit; forexample, "Battery A Ammunition Dump," "1st Battalion, 1stF. A. Ammunition Dump." An ammunition dump becomesa supply point when designated as a distributing point by theunit commander. When ammunition dumps are establishedthe following safety precautions are followed:

(1) The size of stacks should be such as to confine loss fromdeterioration or detonation to a relatively small amount.Stacks should be located 10 or more yards apart and shouldcontain not more than one hundred rounds of 75-mm am-munition, fifty 155-mm projectiles, or twenty-five 240-mm(or corresponding caliber) projectiles. Peacetime standardsshould be followed as nearly as possible.

(2) Every possible use should be made of natural cover(the prescribed method of stacking ammunition is sufficientlyflexible to permit utilization of all possible natural cover).

(3) All stacks not naturally covered must be camouflaged.The following will assist materially in concealing theinstallation:

(a) Irregular shape of stacks.

174

Page 189: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 209-211

(b) Irregular spacing of stacks.(c) Use of existing roads only.(d) Utilization of existing inconspicuous structures.(e) Avoidance of conspicuous land marks.

* 210. SUPPLY METHODS.-Ammunition is hauled from am-munition depots or railheads by one of the three followingmethods:

a. Artillery ammunition vehicles haul all the ammunitionrequired from depots and railheads to batteries.

b. Vehicles are attached to artillery units to assist inhauling ammunition.

c. Ammunition distributing points are established by ahigher echelon.

* 211. SUPPLY PLANNING.-In preparing ammunition supplyplans for division artillery or for a brigade of artillery fora contemplated operation, S-4 must estimate the ammuni-tion required, make a request for the required credits, ob-tain necessary transportation for transporting it and, inconjunction with regimental and battalion S-4's, make plansfor the delivery to battery positions.

a. The ammunition estimate must be made in consulta-tion with S-3. The best available experience tables ofammunition expenditures should be used as a guide. Theprimary factors which affect the estimate are the type andestimated duration of the engagement and the number ofguns and howitzers to be engaged.

b. The request for allocation of the required ammunitionshould show the number of rounds for each caliber andtype of ammunition required, the period for which theammunition is expected to suffice, and the time it shouldbe made available. The request is forwarded through chan-nels prescribed by the force commander or according tostaff practice in the particular unit.

c. The ammunition haulage plan provides for the trans-portation of ammunition from the supply point to batteries.

(1) In making a haulage plan the following items must becovered:

(a) Location and time of opening of the supply point.(b) Time length of the haul.

175

Page 190: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

21.1-212 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

(c) Amount of ammunition to be delivered.(d) Transportation available.(e) Time available.(2) It is generally most convenient to reduce requirements

to truck loads or battalion ammunition train loads, depend-ing on the transportation available, and then to determinethe number of trips required. Such considerations may re-veal the necessity for requesting additional transportation.The detailed haulage plan is evolved after a careful studyof all these factors.

* 212. SMALL-ARMS AMMUNITION.-The relatively smallamount of small-arms ammunition required by field artilleryunits is obtained by arrangement with the ordnance officerof the unit to which the artillery pertains.

176

Page 191: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 3

EVACUATION AND HOSPITALIZATION, REPLACEMENT,MAINTENANCE, AND SALVAGE

U 213. EVACUATION AND HOSPITALIZATION (FMI 101-10).--a.

The medical service of a division comprises-(1) Division surgeon's office.(2) Division medical unit.(3) Medical detachments with units.b. The medical detachment of a field artillery regiment is

organized for division into sections for duty at regimentalheadquarters and with each battalion. The battalion sectionsmay be subdivided into groups for duty at battalion aid sta-tions, with batteries, and as litter bearers. In an animal-drawn organization, the medical detachment includes aveterinary section for treatment and evacuation of animals.

(1) On the march, a section of the medical detachmentmarches at the rear of each battalion. The regimentalsurgeon accompanies the regimental staff. The veterinarypersonnel (horse-drawn regiments) marches at the rear ofthe animal elements. The remainder of the medical detach-ment usually marches at the rear of the regiment. The trans-portation carrying the medical combat equipment usuallymarches with the battalion ammunition trains. March cas-ualties are collected by ambulances with the troop units, bymarch collecting stations established by the division medicalunit, or by a combination of the two methods.

(2) A battery aid squad from the battalion section accom-panies each battery into action. The remainder of eachbattalion section establishes a battalion aid station.

(3) The veterinary aid station for a horse-drawn regimentis established by the veterinary section at or near the pointwhere the animals of the regiment are assembled.

c. Evacuation from unit aid stations is the responsibility ofmedical troops.

* 214. REPLACEMENT.--a. Personnel to replace losses or tobring a unit to its prescribed strength are obtained from the

177

Page 192: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

214-216 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

zone of the interior, from convalescents in the theater ofoperations, and from officers made available by reclassificationor other cause. Requisitions for replacements are preparedby the S-1 sections of regiments and higher units and areforwarded through the normal channels. Replacement eche-lons include division replacement battalions, army replace-ment battalions, and advance and base replacement depots.Replacements are forwarded to organizations by the mostconvenient means available; they should arrive fully clothedand equipped. As a rule, replacements are not furnishedduring a major engagement.

b. Animal replacements are furnished by the Quarter-master Corps through remount depots (army or base).Requisitions for animal replacements are prepared by regi-mental and separate unit supply officers and forwardedthrough normal channels.

0 215. MAINTENANCE.-a. Ordnance materiel.-Repairs toordnance mat6riel of the corps and division artillery whichcannot be made by artillery units are made by the corps ord-nance units. Inspection of ordnance mat6riel is an importantfunction of ordnance personnel in combat.

b. Motor transportation.-Maintenance and repairs of fieldartillery motor transportation (except special vehicles such astractors issued and maintained by the Ordnance Department)are the responsibility of motor maintenance and repair per-sonnel of the Field Artillery and of the Motor TransportService, Quartermaster Corps. The scope of maintenance andrepairs assigned to each is prescribed in FM 25-10.

I 216. SALVAGE.-a. The prompt salvage of abandoned orpartially worn-out material and the exploitation of capturedmaterial make available considerable quantities of suppliesfor issue to troops.

b. Much salvage material originates in the forward combatareas. Regimental commanders are responsible for thecollection of salvage in their areas and for its delivery todesignated collecting points. Salvage operations, however,must not be permitted to interfere with combat and normalsupply operations.

178

Page 193: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 216

c. Because of the difficulties of artillery ammunition sup-ply, it is imperative that there is prompt salvage of ammu-nition from all abandoned positions and supply installations.When an artillery unit moves and finds it impossible to movesome of its ammunition, the unit's munitions officer reportsthe exact amount and location thereof to the munitionsofficer of the next higher echelon. The latter then takes thenecessary steps to salvage it.

d. The S-1 section of each staff supervises the preparationof reports covering captured material, and the S-4 sectioncoordinates and supervises the disposal thereof. Capturedmaterial which cannot be used locally is turned over to thesalvage service or reported to G-4 for disposition.

179

Page 194: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 4

MARCHES

* 217. GENERAL.-a. Marches by the artillery in the presenceof the enemy are discussed in part three. In such marches,the force commander issues instructions for the march, towhich the artillery conforms.

b. In marches not in the presence of the enemy, tacticalconsiderations are of secondary importance. In such cases,because of the varying degrees of mobility in his command,the force commander will usually issue general instructionsonly, covering time, destination, available routes, and suchrestrictions as are necessary to prevent interference betweenlarger units. The artillery commander must then makeadditional decisions and detailed arrangements. Thelogistics of marches are covered in FM 25-10 and FlI 101-10.

c. The conduct of marches is discussed in FM 6-5.

* 218. MARCHING HEAVY ARTILLERY.-The marching of heavyartillery necessitates certain modifications of the generalconsiderations of marches. The principal modification is-due to the wide tread and great weight of the 155-mm. gun..Its width is so great that two-way traffic is impracticableson a road of ordinary width while these guns are being moved,over it. To insure its uninterrupted progress, a serial con-taining these guns should be assigned to one-way roads orroads with wide metalled surfaces. Strong bridges arenecessary.

180

Page 195: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

CHAPTER 5

MOVEMENTS BY RAIL AND WATER

ParagraphsSECTION I. Rail _________________-_______________________ 219-227

II. Water _______________________________________ 228-233

SECTION I

RAIL

* 219. GENERAL.-Administrative details of troop movementsby rail are covered in appropriate Army Regulations. Thelogistics of rail movements are discussed in FM 101-10.

* 220. MOVEMENT OF ARTILLERY.-In view of its high mobilityon highways, the movement of truck-drawn artillery by railwill be exceptional in the theater of operations. For move-ments not in excess of 100 miles, it is generally expedient tomove all artillery by marching. For movements between 100miles and 1,000 miles, it is usually expedient to move animal-drawn (and tractor) artillery by rail and truck-drawn ar-tillery by marching. Tactical and strategical considerationsmay reduce this limit (1,000 miles) in certain situations.

* 221. TRAIN LOADING.-In the theater of operations, artillerywhen moved by rail is usually transported by standard-typetrains. Nonstandard-type trains may be employed outsidethe theater of operations and are generally used in time ofpeace.

* 222. RAIL MOVEMENT ORDERS.-The headquarters ordering arail movement should issue the necessary warning orders andfield orders. The details of such orders are given in FM 101-5and FM 101-10.

* 223. ORDER OF ENTRAINING.-In some cases, it will be neces-sary for troops to fight immediately upon arrival and tacticalconsiderations will govern the order of entrainment of units;in other cases, the troops will merely be changing areas andconsiderations of supply and administration will be para-

181

Page 196: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

:223-225 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

mount. The order of entraining is based upon the order inwhich it is desired to have units arrive in the detraining area.It is desirable that part of the headquarters of battalions andhigher units moving by rail be transported in one of thefirst trains of the unit to arrive in the detraining area. Partof the headquarters should remain in the old area until thelast of its unit leaves.

* 224. TRANSPORTATION GROUPINGS.-a. In general, completeunits are sent from the same entraining points; this appliesespecially to administrative units, such as regiments. It fa-cilitates loading, unloading, and assembly of organizations inthe new area, and avoids divided responsibility with respectto order and police at entraining and detraining points.However, the movement of any unit requiring more than onetrain can be expedited by assigning it more than one entrain-ing point. The tactical unity of battalions should be main-tained, and unless unavoidable, movements of a battalionshould not be split between days.

b. The basic units for rail transportation of the divisionartillery are the gun or howitzer battery and the regimentalheadquarters battery. Unit train accommodations in excessof a battery's requirements are filled by detachments fromother division artillery units and medical troops; such detach-ments should be adequate for the handling of the impedi-menta and animals accompanying them. This rule alsoapplies to subdivisions of a gun or howitzer battery detachedby reason of being in excess of train accommodations for thebattery.

c. Entrainment should be such as will expedite detrain-ment and tactical employment. To this end, for example,a piece and its caisson, a reel and cart, etc., should be groupedon the same flat car; the animals of a section should betogether; and personnel should be grouped by sections.

* 225. ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURE.-a. Organization.-Commanding officers of transportation groupings submit totheir superiors for appropriate action the plans for entrain-ment and detrainment. Plans vary with the variation inloading facilities, number of entraining points, types ofmateriel, tractive power, and railway cars. The plan outlined

182

Page 197: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 225

in the table below exemplifies an entrainment organiza-tion appropriate for horse-drawn artillery. With obvious.modifications, the plan is suitable for entraining motor-drawn artillery.

Organization for entraining one third of a battalion ofhorse-drawn artillery

BATTERY COMMANDER

Group I (vehicles) Group II (animals)

In charge .-..----- 1 officer .-... . .. 1 officer.Assistants. -. . ......... Chief mechanic ------------- Stable sergeant.Property security ------ Detachment of the guard.... Detachment of the guard.Loading detail -----.. . Carpenter; detail of enlisted Horseshoers; stable orderlies;

personnel not mounted. mounted enlisted person-nel; teamsters.

Group III (baggage) Group IV (personnel)

In charge ...-.. . 1 officer ....-. . ........... 1 officer.Assistants ....- .... Supply and mess sergeants.- First sergeant.Property security ...- Detachment of the guard-.- Guard (less detachments).Loading detail --------- Cooks; saddler; other me- Battery clerks; personnel not.

chanics; detail of other required by other groups;enlisted men not mount- personnel released fromed; personnel released from group III.groups I and II.

b. Procedure.-The organization shown in the table in aabove should function in the following manner:

(1) Railway cars are inspected by the battery commanderand the group leaders sufficiently in advance of arrival ofthe command so that cars found unsuitable may be madeready for use before the hour of entraining.

(2) The unit and detachments from other organizationsthat are to travel in the same train are inspected and,when found to be ready to entrain, are marched, group IIIdetached, to the vehicle cars. Group III is dispatched tothe entraining point independently where preparation of

183

Page 198: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

225 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

the kitchen car and loading of rations, forage, and baggageare methodically and promptly accomplished.

(3) Overcoats, raincoats, canteens, saddle bags (grain bagsinside), saddle pockets, haversacks, musette bags, side arms,and special individual equipment are taken into personnelcars by individuals. Blanket rolls, bedding rolls, and car-riage accessories are loaded with other baggage. If troopsare transported in box cars, they retain their blanket rolls.Harness, saddlery, watering buckets, and feed bags areloaded in the forage car. Until required for loading, theforegoing articles are piled on the ground and left underguard.

(4) At the vehicle cars, nonmounted men pack unse-cured accessories in paulins, remove personal equipment,and pass watering buckets to drivers. Vehicles are spottedat the loading ramps by teams as called for, teams beingunhitched and moved to the harness car in turn. Vehiclesare loaded and securely chocked in place by personnel ofgroup I. Its task completed, this personnel, carrying itsequipment and carriage accessories, is reported to the groupIII officer, who causes it to load its blanket rolls and car-riage accessories, and then releases it with its individualequipment to the group IV officer.

(5) Mounted men remove their equipment from the sad-dles and pack the harness and saddlery in sacks at theforage car. The mounted men, leaving these articles andthe watering buckets in piles, lead their animals by teamor section to, the horse cars. The group II officer releasesthe personnel of his group, after loading the animals, togroup III for the loading of saddlery, harness, wateringbuckets, feed bags, forage, and other impedimenta; it is thenreleased, with individual equipment, to group IV.

(6) The group III officer releases cargo vehicles to groupI for loading after the discharge of their last cargo includ-ing accessories and teamsters' blanket rolls.

(7) The group IV officer segregates personnel in detach-ments, each equal in number to the accommodations of theassigned car; each detachment consists of as many wholesections as practicable, under the command of the senior

184

Page 199: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

TACTICS AND TECHNIQUE 225-229

chief of section. Detachments are loaded simultaneouslyshortly before the train departs.

* 226. DETAILS OF LOADING.-Details of loading animals andmat6riel are covered in FM 25-5 and FM 25-10.

* 227. DETRAININGo.-Personnel vacates cars; horse equip-ment, bedding rolls, and accessories are unloaded; animalsare detrained in the reverse order of loading; teams areharnessed and mounted equipment adjusted; teams are thenmoved to the vehicle cars. Vehicles are unchocked and un-loaded in the reverse order of loading and teams hitched.As cargo vehicles are hitched, they are moved to group IIIcars and loaded. A place of assembly is selected near de-training points but at such distance away as will obviatecongestion. Each vehicle and artillery carriage is moved tothe assembly point as soon as loaded and equipped. Whenthe command is detrained and assembled, report is madeto proper authority.

SECTION II

WATER

* 228. REGULATIONS GOVERNING.-Army Regulations pre-scribe the rules governing embarkation, preliminary prepara-tions, routine duties on board ship, debarkation, and thesecrecy to be observed with respect to oversea movements.

* 229. EMBARKATION.-Field Artillery will be embarked so asto expedite its tactical employment when such is expectedupon debarkation. The battalion ordinarily constitutes theembarkation unit; in any event a gun or howitzer batterywill be accompanied on the same transport by its impedimentaand by animals when feasible. Pieces, ammunition, ammu-nition vehicles, supplies, and prime-movers will be stowedon board in the reverse order of debarkation, thus conform-ing to the sequence of tactical requirements. When tacticaldeployment upon debarkation is not contemplated, embarka-tion may be such as will assure economical ship loading; tothis end, personnel is not necessarily accompanied by itsanimals or impedimenta.

185

Page 200: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

230-233 FIELD ARTILLERY FIELD MANUAL

* 230. MOTORIZED ARTILLERY.-Motorized artillery, as com-pared with horse-drawn artillery, is more suitable for unitloading, more economical in space, and more readily putashore.

* 231. ANIMALS.-Depending upon available facilities, ani-mals may be embarked by being led up gangplanks or bybeing hoisted aboard. Animals may be similarly debarkedor they may be required to swim ashore; as many as practi-cable should be led, while swimming, by personnel in smallboats.

* 232. DEBARKATION.-In landings on hostile shores, the de-barkation of artillery impedimenta and animals on the beachis the function of field artillery personnel; operation of allship appliances, including small boats and launches, is theduty of ship personnel.

* 233. CARGO SPACE.-To aid in preparing reports as to cargospace required, the rule that a cubic foot of cargo is equiva-lent to 0.025 of a ship-ton should be applied; for example,allowing 300 cubic feet for an animal of average size, theapplication of the rule indicates that 7l/2 ship-tons arerequired per animal.

186

Page 201: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEXParagraphs Pages

Accompanying artillery_--_______________________ 100 72Advance guards-__------ ----------.----------- 160 125Aid stations _ ---- - -- --___________-__________ 20 '10Air-ground nets ___----------------------------- 91 65Alternate positions_---_-- _________ _________-___ 13 8Ammunition supply--__---_______-____________ 145,204 115, 171

Chain --_____________________-_____-___- ___ 208 172Duties-

Artillery officers and artillery commanders_ 205 171Munitions officers ________-______________ 206 172Train commanders ____________________-. 207 172

-Establishments_--_____________. . ______.____ 209 173Facility ---------- --___________________ 14 8Methods_ -______-______________-____________ 210 175Planning-____________ ____________________ 211 175Small-arms ---_____________________________ 212 176

Animals, movement by water_____ ___-_______--_ 231 186Annexes, field artillery orders ___-__- _____-_.__-__ 196 160Antiaircraft defense __________________-______--- 155 122Army artillery-__.--- __________________________- 95 67Army artillery officer____________________________ 107 76Artillery:

Accompanying__-_________________ ____-____ 100 72Attached -__________________________________ 99 72Commanders, supply functions_ .-__--- ___ .__ 205 171Control_____-_________________ _____--___.__ 166 131Employment_-------_ ________________ 148, 149, 174118,119,145Entry into action --_________________ ____--- 140 108Fires, planning_---_-___________________-___ 150 119Intelligence_--------____-- ___--__----------- 139 108Missions---_--__-- _ -__- _______-__.__-------- 164 128Movement by rail -___-____-___________..--- 220 181Officers with supply functions--___-___-- -____ 199 165Preparation --_________________ _____________ 132 102Requirements, responsibility for ___- ______ 190, 191 155Reserves - -_________________________________ 102 74Supporting_--____ _ --_______________________ 98 71Tactics_-------------------_------------ 96 69With a corps_______ …__-_____________________ 178 148With Cavalry -_________-_______-______-_-- __ 179 149

On counterreconnaissance_ -_____- -__--- 182 150Reconnaissance detachment __---_------- 181 150

With mechanized Cavalry --------.-- ________ 183 150Artillery officers:

Army - -____________________________________ 107 76Corps___________________________________ --- 108 77Division-__________________ -_- ____________ 109 78GHQ ------------------------------------ 106 76Supply functions____________ - - -_________-__ 105 75

Attached artillery_________________ - -_____________ 99 72

187

Page 202: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Attack: Paragraphs PagesEventualities in --------_---______________-- 167 131In a meeting engagement_ -_______-_________ 168 133Night__ -.............. _________________ 185 152Of an organized position___-______--_________ 169 134

Aviation, cooperation with------______--- ________ 144 114Axis of signal communication_--___._____________ 72 43Barrages ---------------------------__--__ .______ 128 99Battalion-

Ammunition train, concealment and protec-tion-_____________________________________ 10 6

Commander__ --------- _ __- __-----_--------- 112 79Commander's order _________________________ 43 26Supply functions--________-_______-_________ 202 168Wire systems_-__._________________._________ 84,85 55, 60

Battery-Commander __- __ ..____-__ ___-_-__ .___-.. 113 80

Reconnaissance ______- __________________ 35 18Commander's order ______________________--_ 36 19Operating alone _-_______________________-__ 39 22Supply functions_________-__________________ 203 169Wire systems --- -_______________-___-_______ 83 63

Brigade-Supply functions _______________-___________ 200 166Wire system --___-__________________________ 87 60

Camouflage of position_______________-_______. __ 59 33Cargo space_---------- --------------------------- 233 186Cavalry division artillery ______________-_________ 93 66Chain of ammunition supply_---------------_____ 208 172Chain of command __ --..----- _--_---.----__--_- 104 75Change of position (displacement) _____________ 40,46, 52 23, 27,29Character of ground at emplacement-___-_------- 8 4Characteristics of Field Artillery ____________-___ 97 69Chemical attack:

Defense against __--_----- ___._------- - -_--_- 65 38Effect of terrain on------------_------------- 11 7

Ciphers______________________ -_________________ 81 50Classification:

Fires ____________________________________-__ 124 97Positions --___-__--_--- _------- ---___-__ .___ 2 1

Codes --------_---_--------------------------- 81 50Command posts______ _---_----------- __----- 18, 62, 71 9,37,42Commander:

Battalion ________-__--_---______________ ..__ 112 79Battery__-__________--_-________---_-- __ 113 80Corps artillery brigade ___- _______--_________ 110 78Division artillery---------------------------- 109 78Regimental_______--------- __------------- _ 111 79

Communication:Messenger ________________---- - - - - -_ 77 48Officers __________________-___-_---________ _ 70, 120 42,95Personnel with commander_______-__-- ___ .__ 24 12Radio __-__---_----_--_--.-----..------------ 76 46Reconnaissance --------- _------------------- 73 43Visual - ____-- --------------------------- 78 49Voice-__------------------------------------ 79 49Wire ___--------- --------------------------- 75 44

188

Page 203: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Paragraphs PagesConcealment _____--------------------------- - 9 5

For limbers, motor vehicles, and ammunitiontrain ----------------__________ ----------- 10 6

Concentrations --------------------------------- 127 98Conduct of fire _--___-- __-- ___.________________ 142 113Considerations governing selection of positions___ 3 2Control of artillery action_-_________ .___________ 166 131Cooperation with aviation _-_____________________ 144 114Corps artillery ____________--___--__--___ ...____ 55, 94 30, 66Corps artillery brigade commander _________-____ 110 78Corps artillery officer ______-_______--________.__ 108 77Counterbattery_____ ______--_______…---… -… ----__ 134 105Counterpreparation ---------------------------- 133 104

Dead space _________--------------------.- 5 3Debarkation_--__--____----------_----__ -------- 232 186

Animals_---__----_------------------------- 231 186Motorized artillery -------------______-_-_ __ 230 186

Defense:Against chemical attack _____________________ 65 38Against mechanized forces __________________ 156 123River line ___------------------------------- 188 153Positions against-

Aircraft ------------------------------- 67 39Ground troops-------------------------- 68 39

Defilade ________------ ------------------------- 9 5Delaying action __--------------------------_--- 176 147Destruction fire --------------------------------- 125 97Detached pieces -------------------------------- 101 73Detraining-------------------------------------- 227 185Directive ------ __------------------------- ------ 193 158Discipline, camouflage_-------------------------- 58 33Displacement __._---------------------------- --- 146 115Division artillery__------------------------------ 54 30

Officer _---_-------------- ------------------ 109 78Dummy positions ------------------------------ 13 8

Embarkation_----__----_----- ------------------- 229 185Emplacement, character of ground at _______-___- 8 4Emplacements ---------------------------------- 61 35Employment of artillery ________--- _------------ 174 145

Method__---------------------------_----- 148 118Plans__------------------------------ 149 119Recommendations for ________-__------------ 194 158

Entraining, order _---_-------------------------- 223 181Entry of artillery into action ________------------ 140 108Equipment tables_------.---------.-------------- 197 165Establishments, ammunition supply_ -------------- 209 173Evacuation ------------------------------------- 213 177Executive--------------------------------------- 115 81

Field Artillery:Characteristics____ ------------------------- 97 69Plans-_------------------------------------ 195 158Recommendations for employment _______--- 194 158Staffs --------------------------------- 114 80

238273°--40-13 189

Page 204: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Paragraphs PagesField of fire -__________________________________- 5 3Fire direction__ __.__…__--__--__________________ 141 110Fires, classification______________________________ -124 97Fires on targets of opportunity-__-_____ -_________ 130 102Flank guards__ - _____------_--__---______-__--_ 162 128Forward observer nets __-_______________________ 90 63

GHQ artillery officer-____________________________ 106 76Ground, character of at emplacement_____________ 8 4Ground troops, defense of position against________ 68 39Groupings:

Transportation______- _. . ..._________________ 224 182Organization and procedure_--_______________ 225 182

Groupment wire systems_________________________ 88 60Groupments, radio systems in --___-__ -__________ 92 65

Halts in presence of the enemy_--____________-__ 158 123Harassing fire_----_-----______._________________ 136 107Heavy artillery:

Marching__ - __.__._______.___________.______ 218 180Reconnaissance for --------_________________ 30 15

Hospitalization__ --------- __-__ ________________ 213 177

Infantry division artillery_____ _____-____________ 82 52Instructions to units____________________________ 28 14Intelligence, artillery …-________-_____-________--- 139 108Intelligence section (S-2)- ________-------- _______ 117 84Interdiction fire__ ________________-- ------------ 135 106

Jungle warfare _________________________________ 189 155

Liaison_________--__-_-------------------------- 143 113Nets_________------------------------------- 90 63Officer___________________ _______________-__ 122 95

Limbers, concealment, and protection for __-______ 10. 6

Maintenance__ _--_--.--.-- ____-__________- 215 178Maintenance section of battery, supply functions__ 203 169March when contact is probable_ _--_-- __________ 41, 48 24, 28March reconnaissance __________________________- 27 14Marches ----_--_--.--------____________________ 217 180

Night --___________________________________ 157 123Marching heavy artillery ------ ___-- _____________ 218 180Measures preparatory to occupation______________ 37 20Mechanized forces, defense against_______________ 156 123Message center ________________________________ 80 49Messenger communication ____________---________ 77 48Method of employment of artillery__________-_____ 148 118Methods of ammunition supply__________________ -210 175Missions, artillery -____-_________________________ 164 128Motor officer _______________________.--- - - - - -____ 123 96Motor vehicles, concealment and protection for.___ 10 6Motorized artillery, movement_ -__________.______ 230 186Mountain warfare ____-______-__________________ 189 155Movement, facility of ---------------_-__-_______ 14 8

190

Page 205: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Paragraphs PagesMovement by water, regulations governing________ 228 185Movement of artillery by rail __________________-- 220 181Munitions officers, ammunition supply functions__ 206 172

Neutralization fire__-----------__ _______________ 126 97Night attacks-______--. .________________________ 185 152Night marches ---__---------_-------___-- ___---- 157 123

Observation posts_--.----_____-- _____----_____ 6,17,63 4, 9, 37Occupation:

Measures preparatory to __________________-- 37 20Of position _____--------.--- ______--__-___-- 44 26Subsequent organization_--_______.------ __- 38 21

Offensive:Early resumption contemplated ___-________- 172 144Early resumption not contemplated---------- 171 138

Officers, communication ______--- _____-----___-- 70 42Order of entraining_--------________--_______--- 223 181Orders_ -__-_---________ _....-_- ------- 34,196 18,160

Battalion commander's___------- __------- -_ - 43 26Battery commander's- _ ---- -____----------- 36 19Rail movement_----______------------------ 222 181Regimental commander's __-_-----_---------- 50 29

Outposts -------------------__--- --------------- 159 124

Personnel__-----____---- _____--____------------- 33 17Shelter for ______-- __.____.________.-------- 16 8

Personnel section (S-1)_________ --------------- 116 82Planning artillery fires __________-_____---------- 150 119Planning of ammunition supply_______________-- 211 175Plans, field artillery_--------___-- _____---------- 195 158Plans and training section (S-3)-----__---------- 118 89Plans for employment of artillery ______----- ___-- 149 119Position:

Camouflage of -__ __ ______---- --------------- 59 33Change of (displacement) _________------- 40, 46, 52 23, 27, 29Reconnaissance --------__-----___----------_ 42, 49 25, 28Selection __----_--_---- __--------------- 42, 49, 57 25, 28, 32

Position in column ____________________-___-__-- 153 121Positions __-------..------___------------------- 165 131

Alternate-__------______. . ...--------------- 13 8Classification __---____-_-------------------- 2 1Considerations governing selection ---------- 3 2Defense of-

Against aircraft_-____------------------- 67 39Against ground troops------------------- 68 39

Dummy ------------------------------------ 13 8Occupation ___________--_-- ---------------- 44 26Range-------------------------------------- 4 3Reconnaissance for _______________---------- 22 12To support a mounted attack _____---------- 180 150

Progressive reconnaissance ___---- _____---------- 26 13Protection for-

Artillery in position ______________---------- 66 39Limbers, motor vehicles, and battalion am-

munition train ------__------___---------- 10 6

191

Page 206: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Paragraphs PagesRadio communication -------------------------- 76 46Radio nets, tactical -_________________________--_ 89 62Radio systems in groupments _----__--- _________ 92 65Raids_ -- ________-_________ 186 152Rail movement orders___________________________ 222 181Range ----------__-_____________________________ 4 3Rear echelons --________________________________ 19 10Rear guards _--___________-___--________________ 161 126Reconnaissance __________-- - _______________ 42, 49, 138 25, 28,108

By battery commander-___________-_________ 35 18Communication__________-_________-__-._ 73 43For heavy artillery _______________--___---__ 30 15For information concerning enemy___________ 25 12For positions_----__ ------------___ -____. 22, 42, 49 12, 25,28For routes -__________--________________-____ 23 12Instructions to units- _ -- _--- ___--- __-----__ 28 14Officer ---------------------------_______ 121 95March___ _______________-____-___.: ________ 27 14Progressive __________________-__._________._ 26 13'ime available for___________________________ 29 14

Regiment, supply in_____________________________ 201 166Regimental commander___-______ .____.____--____ 111 79Regimental commander's order__________________ -50 29Regimental wire system_ _---___--_________---___- 86 60Replacement_ -- - --_____________________________ 214 177Responsibility for artillery requirements__________ 190 155Reserves, artillery __________________________-____ 102 74Retirement __--___-_____________________________ 177 148River crossings__________________- .- ____________ 187 152River line, defense _-_____- _____________________ 188 153Routes, reconnaissance for_______________________ 23 12

S-1 (personnel) section___--_____.___._______-_-_ 116 82S-2 (intelligence) section ________________---- ___ 117 84S-3 (plans and training) section--_----___.--- --- 118 89S-4 (supply) section_____________________________ 119 92Salvage--______-________________ ________--_____ 216 178Schedule fires --_________________ _______________ 129 101Security --____________________ _-_______________ 12 8Selection of position--___--- __________________ 42, 49, 57 25, 28,32Signal communication -------____. __________ 7, 45, 51, 69 4,27,29,41

Axis of -______________-_____________________ 72 43Small-arms ammunition__ --______________________ 212 176Special operations______________________________ - -184 151Staff functions___ - -____________________________ 103 75Subdivisions on the march______________________ - -154 122Supply, ammunition__________--________________ 204 171Supply functions of-

Battalion-__- ____________._________________ 202 168Brigade_ - -__________________--------------- 200 166Maintenance section of battery ---- ___------ 203 169Regiment_______________ - -_________________ 201 166

Supply section (S-4) -___----_-------__-- ___---_- 119 92Supply trains_ ----------______________________ 198 165Supporting artillery___________ - -________________ 98 71Supporting fire-----__________-_-_____ __________ 131 102

192

Page 207: FM 6-20 ( Field Artillery Field Manual: Tactics and ... Arms/FM6_20_1940.pdf · d w fx 6-20 field artillery field manual tactics and technique changes 1 war department, no. 1 j washington,

INDEX

Paragraphs PageTables of supply and equipment_ __-- ____________ 197 165Tactical organization _---__-- ____-- _____________ 137 108Tactical radio nets ______________-______________ 89 62Terrain:

Effect on chemical attack____________________ 11 7Influence of_--_---__------- _ ..__- _____-_____ 151 120

Time available for reconnaissance_ ______________ 29 14Train commanders, ammunition supply functions_ 207 172Train loading ___-________________--____________ 221 181Trains, supply _________________________-_._____ 198 165Transportation groupings ________________---__-_ 224 182

Organization and procedure ____----------------- 225 182

Visual communication _______________________--- 78 49Voice communication _--_________.--____-------- 79 49

Wire communication __--____-- ___--_____________ 75 44Wire systems:

Battery ---------.-----.----.----------- 83 53Brigade ___________--- __--___.____________-- 87 60Groupment ---------------.- ----------.--. 88 60Light battalion -------_---_--_-------- ------ 84 55Medium battalion _________-______________--- 85 60Regimental_----__--_-__.____-______________ 86 6D

Withdrawals ---------.-----___-____-_----------- 175 145

193